UNIVERSITY tF IHh IJNIVFR.^'TY LIBRARY ii»iiiir'rkrti-i-\/ f\r- rt ■ 1 ,r--v.^ lillliiiliiiliiiiiiiililiiiiiiliiB m 3 18PP m.qfi? ^Aftq ) THE WORKS OF GEORGE DALGARNO. AMS PRESS INC. JOHNSON REPRINT CORP. NEW YORK NEW YORK THE WORKS OF GEORGE DALGARNO OF ABERDEEN. REPRINTED AT EDINBURGH M.DCCCXXXIV. Reprinted from the edition of 1834, Edinburgh First reprint edition published 1971 Manufactured in the United States of America International Standard Book Number: Complete Set :0-404-52920-8 Volume 29 :0-404-52987-9 Library of Congress Number :74-165338 AMS PRHSS INC. JOHNSON REPRINT CORP. NEW YORK, N.Y. 10003 NEW YORK, N.Y. 10003 THE MAITLAND CLUB. M.DCCC.XXXIV. THE EARL OF GLASGOW, PRESIDENT. ROBERT ADAM, ESQ. JOHN BAIN, ESQ. ROBERT BELL, ESQ. SIR DAVID HUNTER BLAIR, BART. WALTER BUCHANAN, ESQ. THE MARQUIS OF BUTE. ALEXANDER CAMPBELL, ESQ. ARCHIBALD CAMPBELL, ESQ. LORD JOHN CAMPBELL. JOHN DONALD CARRICK, ESQ. LORD COCKBURN. JAMES DENNISTOUN, ESQ. JAMES DOBIE, ESQ. RICHARD DUNCAN, ESQ. WILLIAM JAMES DUNCAN, ESQ. JAMES DUNLOP, ESQ. JAMES EWING, ESQ. KIRKMAN FINLAY, ESQ. THE MAITLAND CLUB. REV. WILLIAM FLEMING, D.D. WILLIAM MALCOLM FLEMING, ESQ. JOHN FULLARTON, ESQ. JOHN BLACK GRACIE, ESQ. RIGHT HONOURABLE THOMAS GRENVILLE. JAMES HILL, ESQ. LAURENCE HILL, ESQ. GEORGE HOUSTOUN, ESQ. JOHN KERR, ESQ. ROBERT ALEXANDER KIDSTON, ESQ. GEORGE RITCHIE KINLOCH, ESQ. JOHN GIBSON LOCKHART, ESQ. ALEXANDER MACDONALD, ESQ. WILLIAM MACDOWALL, ESQ. THE VERY REV. PRINCIPAL MACFARLAN, D.D. ANDREW MACGEORGE, ESQ. ALEXANDER MACGRIGOR, ESQ. DONALD MACINTYRE, ESQ. JOHN WHITEFOORD MACKENZIE, ESQ. GEORGE MACINTOSH, ESQ. ALEXANDER MACNEILL, ESQ. JAMES MAIDMENT, ESQ. THOMAS MAITLAND, ESQ. WILLIAM MEIKLEHAM, ESQ. WILLIAM HENRY MILLER, ESQ. WILLIAM MOTHERWELL, ESQ. WILLIAM MURE, ESQ. ALEXANDER OSWALD, ESQ. JOHN MACMICHAN PAGAN, ESQ. M.D. THE MAITLAND CLUB. WILLIAM PATRICK, ESQ. EDWARD PIPER, ESQ. ROBERT PITCAIRN, ESQ. JAMES CORBET PORTERFIELD, ESQ. HAMILTON PYPER, ESQ. PHILIP ANSTRUTHER RAMSAY, ESQ. JOHN RICHARDSON, ESQ. WILLIAM ROBERTSON, ESQ. ANDREW SKENE, ESQ. JAMES SMITH, ESQ. JOHN SMITH, ESQ. JOHN SMITH, YGST., ESQ. WILLIAM SMITH, ESQ. MOSES STEVEN, ESQ. DUNCAN STEWART, ESQ. SIR MICHAEL SHAW STEWART, BART. SYLVESTER DOUGLAS STIRLING, ESQ. JOHN STRANG, ESQ. HIS ROYAL HIGHNESS THE DUKE OF SUSSEX. THOMAS THOMSON, ESQ. PATRICK ERASER TYTLER, ESQ. ADAM URQUHART, ESQ. SIR PATRICK WALKER. WILSON DOBIE WILSON, ESQ. TABLE OF CONTENTS. NOTICE, LEXICON GRAMMATICO-PHILOSOPHICUM, ARS SIGNORUM, LEXICON LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM, PRAXIS, DIDASCALOCOPHUS, A DISCOURSE OF DOUBLE CONSONANTS, PAGE V. 11. 27. 83. 104. 117. 161. EDINBURGH : PRINTED BY T. CONSTABLE. M.DCCC.XXXIV. 1^ 'i^^f ^ m ' ^^^ ^ 1 s k M 1 g ^ ^ i 1^ ^fc^ s»^ HE first idea of reprinting the Works of George Dalgarno, as a private contribution to the Maitland Ckib, was suggested by the following passages in the writings of Mr. Stewart, which, coming from so high an authority, have not hitherto met with the attention they merit. " Of the Scottish authors," says this eloquent Philosopher, in a note to his Preliminary Dissertation to the Encyclopedia Britamiica, " who turned their attention to metaphysical studies, prior to the union of the two Kingdoms, I know of none so emi- nent as George Dalgarno of Aberdeen, author of two works, both of them strongly marked with sound philosophy, as well as with original genius. The one published in London, 1661, is entitled, Ars signorum, vulgo character universalis et lingua philosophica, qua poterunt homines diversissimorum idiomatum, spatio duarum septemanarum, omnia animi sui sensa (in rebus familiaribus) non minus intelligibiliter, sive scribendo, sive loquendo, mutuo communi- VI care^ qiiam Unguis propriis vernaculis, Frceterea^ June etiam pote- runt juvenes, philosophise principia, et veram logicce praxin, citius et facilius multo imhihere^ quam ex vulgarihus philosophorum scriptis. The other work of Dalgarno is entitled, Didasca- locophus, or The Deaf and Dumb Mans Tutor. Printed at Oxford, 1680. I have given some account of the former in the notes at the end of the first volume of the Philosophy of the Human Mind; and of the latter, in a Memoir, published in Vol. VII. of the Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. As they are now become extremely rare, and would together form a very small octavo volume, I cannot help thinking that a bookseller, who should reprint them, would be fully indemnified by the sale. The fate of Dalgarno will be hard indeed, if, in addition to the unjust neglect he experienced from his contemporaries, the proofs he has left of his philosophical talents shall be suffered to sink into total oblivion." ^ In the notes to the Philosophy of the Human Mind, here re- ferred to, Mr. Stewart, after quoting a letter from Leibnitz to Mr. Burnet of Kemney, dated in the year 1697, on the subject of a Real Character, and a Philosophical Language, remarks, that " the person mentioned by Leibnitz under the name of M. Dal- garus, was evidently George Dalgarno, a native of Aberdeen, and author of a small and very rare book, entitled Ars Signorum, ^c. It is very remarkable that this work of Dalgarno is never (at least as far as I recollect) mentioned by Wilkins ; although it appears from a letter of Charles II., prefixed to Dalgarno's book, that Wilkins was one of the persons who had recommended him to the royal favour." ^ The following notice of Dalgarno by Mr. Stewart in his Ac- ' Preliminary Dissertations to the Encyclopedia Britannica, p. 284-5. ^ Philosophy of the Human Mind. 4to. Vol. I. p. 552-3. VII count of a Boy born Deaf and Blind, is more elaborate and interesting.^ " After having thus paid the tribute of my sincere respect to the enhghtened and benevolent exertions of a cele- brated foreigner (Sicard), I feel myself called on to lay hold of the only opportunity that may occur to me, of rescuing from oblivion the name of a Scottish writer, whose merits have been strangely overlooked both by his contemporaries and by his successors. The person I allude to is George Dalgarno, who, more than a hundred and thirty years ago, was led by his own sagacity to adopt, a priori, the same general conclusion concern- ing the education of the dumb, of which the experimental dis- covery, and the happy application, have, in our times, reflected such merited lustre on the name of Sicard. I mentioned Dal- garno formerly, in a note annexed to the First Volume of the Philosophy of the Human Mind, as the author of a very ingenious tract entitled Ars Signorum, from which it appears indisputably that he was the precursor of Bishop Wilkins in his speculations concerning a Real Character, and a Philosophical Language ; and it now appears to me equally clear, upon a farther acquaintance with the short fragments which he has left behind him, that, if he did not lead the way to the attempt made by Dr. Wallis to teach the dumb to speak, he had conceived views with respect to the means of instructing them, far more profound and comprehen- sive than any we meet with in the works of that learned writer, prior to the date of Dalgarno's publications. On his claims in these two instances I forbear to enlarge at present ; but I can- not deny myself the satisfaction of transcribing a few paragraphs in justification of what I have already stated, with respect to the remarkable coincidence between some of his theoretical de- ductions, and the practical results of the French Academician. 3 Philosophy of the Human Mind. 4to. Vol. III. App. p. 453-9. VIII " I conceive there might be successful addresses made to a " dumb child even in its cradle, when he begins risu cognoscere. " matrem ; if the mother or nurse had but as nimble a hand, as " commonly they have a tongue. For instance, I doubt not but " the words hand, foot, dog, cat, hat, &c. written fair, and as often " presented to the deaf child's eye, pointing from the words to the " things, and vice versa,, as the blind child hears them spoken, " would be known and remembered as soon by the one as the " other. And as I think the eye to be as docile as the ear ; so "• neither see I any reason, but the hand might be made as tract- " able an organ .as the tongue ;.and as soon brought to form, if not " fair, at least legible characters, as the tongue to imitate and echo " back articulate sounds." — " The difficulties of learning to read, " on the common plan, are so great, that one may justly wonder " how young ones come to get over them. Now, the deaf child, "' under his mother's tuition, passes securely by all these rocks and "quicksands. — The distinction ofletters,theirnames, their powers, " their order, the dividing words into syllables, and of them again " making words, to which may be added Tone and Accent ; none " of these puzzling niceties hinder his progress. — It is true, after " he has past the discipline of the nursery, and comes to learn " grammatically, then he must begin to learn to know letters " written, by their figure, number, and Dfder," &c. &c. The same author elsewhere observes, that " the soul can exert " her powers by the ministry of any of the senses: And, therefore, " xihen she is deprived of her principal Secretfiries, the Eye and " the Ear, then she must he contented with the service of her lackeys " and scullions, the other senses ; which are no less true and faithful " to their mistress, than the eye and the ear ; but not so quick for " dispatchy I shall only add one other sentence, from which my readers IX will be enabled, without any comment of mine, to perceive with what sagacity and success, this very original thinker had antici- pated some of the most refined experimental conclusions of a more enlightened age. " My design is not to give a methodical system of grammatical " rules ; but only such general directions, whereby an industrious " Tutor may bring his deaf Pupil to the vulgar use and hr, of a lan- " g^i^o^ > t^^^t ^^ 1^^ "^^y be the more capable of receiving instruc- " tion in the hi bu from the rules of grammar, when his judgment " is ripe for that study : Or, more plainly ; I intend to bring the " way of teaching a deaf man to read and write, as near as possible, " to that of teaching young ones to speak and understand their " mother-tongue." In prosecution of this general idea, he has treated, in one very short chapter, of a Deaf Mans Dictionary ; and in another, of a Grammar for Deaf Persons ; both of them containing (under the disadvantages of a style uncommonly pedantic and quaint) a variety of precious hints, from which, if I do not deceive my- self, useful practical lights might be derived, not only by such as may undertake the instruction of such pupils as Mitchell or Mas- sieu, but by all who have any concern in the tuition of children durinty the first stage of their education. The work from which these quotations are taken, is a very small volume, entitled " Didascalocophus, or. The Deaf and " Dumb Mans Tutor, printed at the Theater at Oxford, 1680." As I had never happened to see the slightest reference made to it by any subsequent wTiter, I was altogether ignorant of its existence, when a copy of it, purchased upon a London stall, was a few years ago, sent to me by a friend,'^ wlio, amidst a * Francis Horner. — Ed. multiplicity of more pressing engagements and pursuits, has never lost sight of the philosophical studies of his early years. I have been able to learn nothing of the author, but what is contained in the following slight notice, which I transcribe from Anthony Wood. " The reader may be pleased to know, that one " Georo"e Daloarno, a Scot, wrote a book, entitled, Ars Signorum, " &c. London, 1661. This book, before it went to press, the " author communicated to Dr. Wilkins, tc'//o,/ro;/i thence taking a " hint of greater matter, carried it on, and brought it up to that " which you see extant. This Dalgarno was born at Old Aber- " deen, and bred in the University at New Aberdeen ; taught a " private grammar school with good success for about thirty years " together, in the parishes of S. Michael and S. Mary Mag. in " Oxford ; wrote also, Didascalocophus, or The Deaf and Dumb " Man's Tutor ; and dying of a fever, on the 28th of August " 1687, aged sixty or more, was buried in the north body of the " church of S. Mary Magdalen." (Ath. Oxon. Vol. XL p. 506-7.) The obscurity in which Dalgarno lived, and the complete oblivion into which his name has fallen, are not a little wonder- ful, when we consider that he mentions among the number of his friends Dr. Seth Ward, Bishop of Sarum ; Dr. John Wilkins, Bishop of Chester ; and Dr. John Wallis, Professor of Astronomy at Oxford. It is still more wonderful, that no notice of him is taken in the works either of Wilkins or of Wallis, both of whom must have derived some very important aids from his specula- tions. This unfairness on the part of AVilkins, has not escaped the animadversion of one of his own biographers. " In the prefatory " epistle (he observes) to the Eaaay towards a Real Character, " Dr. Wilkins mentions several persons who assisted him in this " work, particularly Willoughby, Ray, and Dr. William Lloyd, and XI " others ; but it is remarkable, that he does not mention Dalo-arno, " and the more, because Dr. Wilkins's own name is printed in the " margin of King Charles II.'s letter prefixed to Dalgarno's book, " as one of those who informed his Majesty of Dalgarno's desio^n, " and approved it, as a thing that might be of singular use to " facilitate an intercourse between people of different lano-uao-es; " which prevailed with his Majesty to grant his said letters of "recommendation to so many of his subjects, especially of the " Clergy, as were sensible of the defectuousness of art in this " particular." — Biog. Britan, Art. Wilkins."^ That Dalgarno's suggestions with respect to the Education of the Dumb, were not altogether useless to Dr. Wallis, will, I think, be readily admitted by those who take the trouble to compare his letter to Mr. Beverley (published eighteen years after Dalgarno's treatise) with his TiYictatus de Loquela, published in 1653. In this letter some valuable remarks are to be found, on the method of leading the dumb to the signification of words ; and yet, the name of Dalgarno is not once mentioned to his correspondent. If some of the details and digressions in this note should be censured, as foreign to the principal design of the foregoing Memoir, I can only plead in excuse, my anxiety to do justice, ^ 111 Grainger''s Blogi'apliical History of England, mention is made of a still earlier publication than the Ars Signorum, entitled " The Universal Character, by which " all Nations in the World may understand one another\s conceptions, reading out of " one common Writing their own Tongue. By Cave Beck, Rector of St. Helen's, in " Ipswich, 1657." This book I have never seen. The name of Dalgarno (or Dalgarus, as it has been sometimes written) is not alto- gether unknown on the Continent. His Ars Signorum is alluded to by Leibnitz on various occasions, and also by Fontenelle in the Eloge of Leibnitz. His ideas with respect to the education of the Dumb, do not seem to have attracted any notice what- ever. In fact, they were much too refined and enlightened to be duly appreciated at the period when he wrote. XII even at the distance of a century, to the memory of an inge- nious man, neglected by his contemporaries, and already in dancrev of being totally forgotten by posterity. To those whose curiosity may lead them to study his books, the originality of his conceptions, and the obvious application of which some of his principles admit to the peculiarities of the case now before us, will of themselves suggest a sufficient apology." The preceding extracts exhaust all that is known of George Dalgarno, and of his writings. They are eminently calculated to excite curiosity regarding his speculations on the interesting subjects of a Real Character, and a Philosophical Language ; and, to those who take delight in tracing the history of Philosophy, even in her more obscure departments, no apology can be neces- sary for the present attempt to fulfil Mr. Stewart's generous wish, that the name of Dalgarno should be rescued from obli- vion. EDINBURGH, M.DCCC.XXXIV. Ars Signorum, VULGO CHARACTER UNIVERSALIS ET LINGUA PHILOSOPHICA. Qa poterunt, homines dicersissimorum Idiomatum, spatio duarum septimanarum, omnia Animi sua sensa (in Rebus Familiaribus) non minus intelligi- hiliter, sive scribendo, sive loquendo, mutuo com- municare, qam Linguis propriis Vernaculis. Prce- terea, hinc etiam poterunt Juvenes, Philosophioe Principia, et veram Logicce Praxin, citius et fa- cilius multo imbibere, qam ex vulgaribus Philo- ^phorum Scriptis. Authore Geo. Dalgarno, lioc ultra. LONDIN I, Excudebat J. Hayes, Sumptibus Authoris, Anno reparatae salutis, 1661, Shod CAROLOI KANEL Sofa, Un Sefap, srf Britannoi Svma, Hihernoi, Francoi; Un Krumel s^f Tvpu Siba Christoisa Kanel Svfa K ANELLI funa f»;f Nom, fympomefi avvi fuma, lul, Sava Kanel f^jf Kanelli famefa bred Nam fas L,;l ; Tin lol-fas, lelilli punefi, hn\ famefu avvi Uma ben Nom fas lelil ; trim avvi ftf kufu fliom kriifu. Avvi f^fa ftf krufu, tim, fpinu t'jn f^n-famu f^jf Temmu, lul, fameli Stenu tipo, ft'/fo, t'in pomo. T>;n flun, tim ftjifu ftf Stenu, lul-dan, Temmu t?;n Tennu tim popo, HjU, tim ft»!fu ftf Kanel, lul-dan tim Kanel fjjf Kranelli tibo. Temmu fameli Stenu fefa, fyn, fhumu ihf uvvi t'in ft'ibbu, IIiju ; fas, avvi lola tim fof-fefa {hr,g Temu. Kanel Sufa, lal Kranel L^ila lli;;fa fp'jfefi lliod LjjI Temu fufa, lul, fpr/nofa dan f)]pdannu fliuma f^ba : h^il fub-dan tifeia fprifu L'jla, flume t^in pemre tr^nu L»!la fafefu tutu lola : T>!n hrjl tubefa, flam Trinnu L»;la, kranelli kla tibo, p^nefu Sagu L'ila Kana. St^jpu fli^ma fifrefu Temu lola lima ; t'ln lolir famefu Tonu Un SUfu L'lla, tin Tonu fif Stenu, t»!n (lul tim fon) Tonu fjif Sava, pemo bred daddu brepa fif Nom. Lol-fas Kanel Sum-fefa, tupefo Kafelli, Tibelli, tin Temelli L»jla, tibefu pipai fibu tin figu fif Temu lola ; tin lul-dan Lil pemefa taggu fif lelilli fliop lela, fim-fodefo lliod Safel tin Sj^inel, fos fatu fif fpippu fif lelil. Lal trim tunefi Stj;ffu tin Stibbu ; fliom, fjjl-fjjpu lela, lul, fefrefu lal llemefu tin fifrefu Temu lola femo, thani fkradu M Sava, S7;fu M Ld Kanel lala, fim-tipu M Stenu lala, iigu f'lf iivvi funa, tin fibu M Eiv lala. Lolirri tim fliammii fuma, fliam lul, lal pebefi Oipef^ ; t7;n lul-dan Sava fabefa lal fliam lelirri, trim prebcf'^ fli';pefu. Tm Hem lel-dan, lal tim, Kanel S^f-sefa Kranel Lrja knba Georgoi Dalgarnoi. CHARLES R. TX^ Hereas We have been informed by the Teftimonies of divers Learned Men* from both the Univerfities of Our Kingdom o^ England, con- cerning the great pains taken by George I)aIgarno, in a Scholaftick and Li- terary Defign, of an Universal Character and Philosophical Laiiguage ; All of them approving and commending his Difcovery, judging it to be of lingular ufe, for facilitating the matter of Communication and Intercourfe between people of different Languages, and confequently a proper and effedual Means for advancing all the parts of Real and Ufeful Knowledge, Civiliz- ing barbarous Nations, Propagating the Gofpel, and encreafmg Traffique and Commerce. We underftanding moreover, by Certificates from feveral credible Perfons, that through the various Viciffitudes of Providence, he hath fuffered the lofs of a confiderable Eftate, by reafon whereof, he is wholly difinabled from affording that Charge and Expence for the Effe6tual pro- fecuting of this Work, as the Nature of it requires. We therefore, out of a tender confideration of the Premifes, and for manifefting Our Good Will and Affeftion towards the promoting of Art, and the encouraging all liicli ingenious perfons of Our Subjeds, who fliall attempt and Effe6t any thing tending to Publike Good ; As We do De- clare, that, We will Our Selves exprefs fome Token of Our Royal Favour, for the helping forward this fo Laudable and Hopeful Enterprize ; So alfo, Reflefting upon its Common and Univerfal ufefulnefs, We do by thele * R. Love, D.D., J. Wilkins, D.D., J. Wallis, D.D., S. Ward, D.D., W. Dillingham, D.D. C Our Letters of Recommendation incite as many of Our Subjefts (efpecially the Reverend and Learned Clergy) as are truly apprehenfive and fenfible of the defeftivenels of Art, chiefly in this particular of Language ; what great lofs Mankind is at there-through, how acceptable it will be before God, and praiie worthy among Men, to Encourage and Advance thofe waies of Learning, wherein the General Good of Mankind is intended ; That fuch would, as their Affeftions fhall encline them, and their places enable them, put their helping hands to the bringing forth this (as yet) Infant Defign, now flicking in the Birth. This will give juft caufe to Our Pofterity through lucceeding Genera- tions, while they are reaping the Fruit of Our Ingeny and induftry, to look back upon Us with Reverence ; And from Our Example they will be pro- voked not to reft upon what they fhall have received from Us ; but ftill to be Endeavouring to proceed in a further repairing the Decayes of Na- ture, untill Art have done its laft, or, which is moft probable, Nature ceafe to be, or be Renewed. Given at Our Court at Whitehal this 26'^ of November , in the 12* Year of our Reign. Will. Morice. Lectori Philosopho. TUdicio tuo (Le6lor Philofophe) Inventa li£ec mea de Confiifionis Lin- •^ guarum remedio (quantum fcil. malum hoc Arte reparabile eft) vifum eft prius fubjicere, quam inertis Vulgi manibus terantur. Lege, perlege, et relege. Cave autem ne inter judicandum, non feparanda fepares, id eft, partem Logicam et Grammaticam ; fed ut fententiam sequius feras, finem ultimum (Communicationis facilitatem) primo refpice. Experire quid veri contineat fententia cujufdam Viri Dofti de liaec Arte. Tria Momenta ei affignabat. 1 . Dixit Artem banc videri plane impoffibilem. 2. Poflibi- lem quidem fed valde difficilem. 3. Vero, mire et fuj^ra fidem facilem. Forte erudite Ledor, antequam Libellum hunc in manus fumpferas, tibi videbatur haec Ars omnino fabulofa et impoflibilis ; Sed ex iis quae hie dida funt, jam vides poffibilem, fed adhue valde difficilem : Quare progre- dere adhuc ultra ad Praxin, eique paululum diligenter intende, et nihil dubito quin veritatem tertii maxima cum voluptate et emolumento perci- pies. Hominibus Sciolis qui hoc unicum poffunt aliorum Scripta carpere, Artiumque Prima Principia quantum in ipfis eft funditus evertere (dum tamen ipfi nihil ponunt) mecum fubride. Aut Artium omnium qucedam Principia funt ftabilienda, aut oninis Ars ruitura eft; maxime vero in Arte Signorum, prae aliis omnibus, Arbitrium eft neceftario admittendum. Prag- maticis vero, qui falcem in alienam meflem injicere funt. parati, ut fefti- nent lente, et caveant ne fimul cum laboribus, honorem etiam quern am- biunt periclitentur, mecum confule. Abfit autem haec a me ja6lanter difta lint, quail exiftemarem me folum huic Sufcepto parem: Tantum enim abeft, meis viribus confidam, lit, per haec ad omnes Do6tos provocem qui Traftatulum hunc in manus fument ; quorum Ingenia, ftudia, otiumque et feceflus Cenfores idoneos fecerint ; ut, fi quae laus, fi quis honor, fi quis Generis Hiimani amor, (i quod ftudium Artes et Rem Literariam promo- vendi, fi quic denique Pofterorum cura : Per omnia haec Menti Generofae chariffima, obteftor, rogo, flagito, obfecro ; Do6lrinam banc novam, jam quinque fere Annorum ftudio ad banc maturitatem per du6tam, fevere (iimul tamen candide et lincere) examinent, probent ; mihique fua fenfa de ea quam citiffime renuncient. Si enim in aliquo ad melius confulant, et Errorem meum non folum detexerint, fed fine majore Errore emenda- verint, promitto me Animo facile et grato eorum monitis obtemperaturum. Cumqiie expe6landiim non fit, unicum quemvis hominem, omnibus No- tionibus Naturae et Artis Nomina apta, Philofophice et fecundum Rerum Naturas inflituere poffe ;• nifi prius earum accuratas Definitiones a vari- arum Artium peritis habeat : Vos igitur Viros Virtuofos et fingularium Artium vera Magiflros compello. Quifque de fuo penu ad banc Babelem reflaurandam materiam miniflret. En jaftum Fundamentum fatis am- plum et firmum : Non enim vel minimum dubito, quin omnes Notiones Naturae et Artis ex Radicalibus hie pofitis fatis perfpicue definiri poflint : Hoc tamen unum intendite, ut Rerum Defcriptiones, Differentias maxime Communes et notas exhibeant, et ab aliis rebus maxime diflinguentes ; idque quam pauciffimis vocibus, ne voces hujus Linguae ex iis componendae in nimiam longitudinem excrefcant. Homines Superflitiofe nimis, fuf- ceptum hoc, Facinus Audax a Deo vetitum opinantes, ne audite. An Deus O. Hominibus libertatem indulfit, Carduos et Sentes ex agris era- dicandi ? Errores autem ex Coelefli Animorum Solo exftirpare prohibuit ? Abfit ! Ne credite. Deus ipfe ejufque Principaliores Miniflre (hie in Terris) Natura fcil. et Aps, eadem Methodo in operando utuntur, id efl, progrediendo ab imperfedioribus ad Perfediora. Quid hinc de hac Arte conchidam facile efl colligere. Quantus autem fit futurus ejus frudus (praecipue fi in Scholas introducatur ejus ufus) in Pofteris Seculis, vos Viros Dodos variis veflris conjeduris relinquo. Valete, Geo. Dalgarno. Alpliabetum hujus Linguae Philofopliicae. Singulsc LiteivT in principio didionis funt Charaaerifticae Notionum Genericamm in Tabulis, ut infra indicatur. A Ens, res H Substantia E Accidens I Ens Concretum ex Subst. et Aceid. O Corpus X Spiritus U Concretum ex Corpore et Spiritu. 1 . Homo M Concretum Mathematicum N Concretum Physicum F Concretum Artefactum B Accidens Mathematicum D Accid. Physicum Generale G Quahtas Sensibihs P Accidens Sensitivum T Accidens Rationale K Accidens PoUticum S Accidens Commune, ahas, servilis R Servilis, significat oppositionem L Servilis, significat medium inter extrema V Characterist. vocis numericae. Notae Numericae, A 1 M 1 Vado 154 H 2 N 2 Ventum 32861 E 3 F 3 Vapulo 17604 4 B 4 Vel30 r 5 D 5 Vendo 3254 U 6 G 6 Vetuit 38608 AI 7 P 7 Valih 10000 EI 8 T 8 Void 95 01 9 K 9 Vestis 380 I L Verrere 333 10 Placuit Gratitudinis ergo, et ut alii incitentur ad Artem banc Novaiii ulterius propagandum, eomm Nomina adfcribcre, Quorum munilicentia (cum meis laboribus) Ars liaec a primo Inventionis lemine ad lianc ma- turitatem crevit, jamque Lucem Publicum videt. Horum nemo infra fummam unius Librae Anglicana?, nemo fupra decern, largitus eft. R. Boile Com. a Corke. Fat. German. G. Morice Baronet Secret. Regius. C. Culpeper Baronet. J. Keate Baronet. G. Crook Baronet. T. Dillingham T. D. G. Dillingham T. D. J. Wilkins T. D. .V. Ward T. D. H. Wilkinso7i T.D. F. WalselT.T). R. Whichcoat T. D. J. Bathurst M. D. G. Pettie M. D. A. Morgan M. D. J. Stock Armig. Whitle Ai-mig. Baccow Armig. Gold Armig. J. Sparrow Armig. />. Fogge T. B. .S". Byjield A. M. /. Tillotson A. M. Cooper A. M. Staughton A. M. Floyd A. M. R. Cumberland A. M. T. Br anker A. M. F. Lodwick Civ. Lond. E. Bale Civ. Lond. T. Slater Civ. Lond. D. Henchman. 11 LEXICON GRAMMATICO-PHILOSOPHICUM, SEU Tabulae Reriim, et Notionum omnium Simpliciorum, et Generaliorum, tani Artefadarum quam Naturalium, Rationes, et Refpeftus communiores, Methodo Praedicamentali ordinatas, comple6leiites: Quibus fignificandis, Nomina, non Cafu, fed Arte, et Confilio, fervata inter Res et Siirnu convenientia Analogica, inftituuntur. Ex quibus, Rerum et Notionum aliarum omnium magis Complexarum et Ipecialorum Nomina, vel De- rivatione, vel Compolitione, in una vel pluribus vocibus, per Regulas quafdam Generales et certas, fecundum Analogiam Logico-Grammati- cam, formantur; Ita ut Nomina lie formata, Rerum Defcriptiones i|)- larum Natura3 confentaneas, contineant. Av Ens, Res Hv Substantia Ev Accidens Iv Ens completum, vel con- cretum Ov Corpus Yv Spiritus Vv Compositum ; id est, Homo. Meis Concretum Matliematicum. MeiM Species! sfimplues!* mam punctum uiJjm linea mem superficies mim solidum. MeiB jTigfura* mab circulus m»!b sphcera meb spira mib cuhus mob conus mub cilandis mub piramis. partes! jTiffurae* ab basis r. cacumen '/jb lahcs r, angulns eb perimetrum r. area ib axis r. polus ob gumphus r. impages. Neis Concretum Pliyiicum. NeiMNeiF Inanimatum. NeiM ^impleir* nam ccelum nrim ignis nem aer nim aqua nom terra. 12 LEXICON as Stella neb iw radice nib infructu ar lima nob legumen al so/. nub frumentum part^£{ iffitisf* nub condimentum. r,sfumus T.Jlamma r,t cinis T.fuligo. SNeiBeiD iHisicenanea. snab marina |3artes! aerisf* snrjb lacustris es nuhes sneh junci et arundines er cetitus. snib convolvula partes; aq[uae* snob spinosa snuhjilices is w/ore r.Jltivius snub scabiosa \vfons 1. palus r. rivus. snad tomentosa partes! terrae* o.s continens r. insula or wows 1. planities r. vaWis ol cayeo r. rupes. sn»;d umbellifera sued corimbifera snid lactaria snod nervosa snud linosa NeiN ;^eteo^on» snud semper viva. nail ignitum \\r,\\ aerium lien aqueum iiin terrenum. NeiD jflore $nsignisi« nad bulbosa nrid non bulbosa. NeiF i^merale* NeiG iCignosia, naf medium nag suffrutex wni lapis nr,gfrutex spinosus sn»!f /apis pretiosus neg semper viridis nef metallum. nig won spinas, semitiif. NeiDBeiG Planta. Sneib imperfecta. NeiBeiD Herba. NeiB ^>S(Ca* nab bestice vesca nr}i komini in folio nog bacciferus. SNeiG ^itou snag sterilis sn»)g glandifera sneg conifera snig nucifera snog prunifera GRAMMATICO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 13 snug pomifera snug acini/era. ^arUsf plantar peremiesf* ad succus rid radio; 1. truneus r. ramus ed cortex 1. caro r. medulla id geniculum r. internodium od spina r. lanugo ud gummi r. resina. ud surculus. ^Bartes; ^nntiae* ng folium X.Jlos r.fructus r,g pappus eg ca/i.r ig palea r. siliqua og sjaica ug arista ng putam,en r. nucleus. NeiPTeiK Brutum neipeit imperfectum SNeiPTeiK Exangue s Nei p Cerium Volatile* snap detectipennis sn»)p bipennis snep voginipennis. s Nei T 9[queum* snat mo//e apodum snrjt woZ/e pedatum, snet crustaceum caudatum snit crustaceum, rotundum snot testaceum turbinatum in anfrac- tum snut testae, turb. in orbem, snut conchce. s Nei K Cerr^sitre* snak apodum snjjk paucipedatum snek multipedatum NeiPTeik Sanguineum. NeiP ^rmm id est, ^ibisi* nap carnivora n»)p nocturna nep canora nip domestica nop pulveratricea nup aquatica nup palmipes. ^parted ^bis;. spe penna r. pluma spi a/a spo crista, Neit 9[queum id est f isfn'g* nat squamosus nrjt IcBvis net cartilagineus nit planus not Jluviatilis nut Cf^/e. partes; ^pisifisi* ot branchia ut squama r. pinna. NeiK Cerresitre* nak oviparum nrik solidipes nek bisulcum, nik multifidum majus nok multifidum minus nuk «w6 ^erra degens D 14 LEXICON nuk serpens neiteik amphihion Partes Bruti in Genere. eiM €)rcremeiititiae» am crinis r. unguis r,m cholera r. melancholia em stercus r. urina im mucus ova. Cauda r. juha um cornu r. ungula. eiN ^artesJ jTIuOrae utfles;* an humar r. pituita r,\\ sanguis r. spiritus en /ac r. semen in modulla r. cerebrum on chylus. eiF ^permatica^* af OS r. cartilago >)f CM^e* r. memhrana ef ccrro r. adeps if uewa r. arteria of nervus r.Jibra uf ligamentum. Meis Caput r. CoIIum* ma cranium r. fades m?) oculus r. aurus mefrons r. occiput mi cilium mo tempora mn nasus. Neis (!^0» na dew* r. lingua n>} gingiva ne palatum ni labium r. mentum no bucca no ^w^a nu gurgulio. Feis Crunrusi* fa pectus U mamma r. umbilicus fe scapula r. co; brachium r. femur sme cubitus r. ^i6m smi cubitus r. genu smo carpus r. cai.z? smu manus r. jae* parvus smu digitus r. digitus pedis. s Neis partesi (I^rgannirae beittri£f mfimu sna CBSophagus 1. ventriculus r. iw- snTj peritoneum 1. omentum r. ?rte- sne ejoar r. ^e«^e« sni /ien r. /e/ sno vesica r. rew sno uterus r. vin/a i^xiwfcetus X. ovum. FLcis partes; metriae cabitatisf* fla diaphragma fl») pulmo fle cor. GRAMMATICO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 15 Feis Concretum Artefa6tum. FeiMNeiF NeceflTarium. FeiM vi6tus et Amiftus. FLeiM WM^. flam panis fl»!m potus flem^MS Condimentum Aim hutyrum flom caseiis flum fartum flum artocreas. FReiM amiftUSS* frem pannus frim pidvinar from saccus fr-^m omamentum. FeiN ^etrifinum* fan domus f);n navis fen pows. partes! ^etriftrii ^eneralwreig* ap tignum r. asseres. '/)p /aier r. ccemenhim ep columna r. arcus ip cancelli op scaZa up vallum r. agger up ofte.x-. eiK partes ^penalioreg^ ak ostium r. fenestra ik caminus r. fornacc ek grundia ik vestibulum r. postica ok contignatio uk transtra 1. teguli r. capreoli uk tectum 1. paries r. pavimentum. parto ^abi£f^ at mains r. transenna »)t clavus r. anchora et remus r. velum. ^iippellev ^ana* fam canalis fmn funis fern /^eca fim acicula fom ffCM* fi^m forfex fiim pecunia. FReiN ^uppdle;: ©ornMita* fran mensa fr^jn candela fren t^as frin cathedra fron sporta frt^n area frun lectus. FieiN ^uppelle^ ^usitira* flan aratrum fl»!n occa flen Zzgro flin currus. Fei F air Communirantium* faf atramentum fjjf charta fef /i6er 16 LEXICON FeiBDeig Voluptuarium. Fei B iHusJinim* fab organum pneumaticum fr,h lyra feb cymhalum fib pa nd lira fob tympana fjh tuba fub campana. Fei D (jPnilum IBelertantia* fad Indus Ud pictura fed spectaculum. FeiPTeiK Perniciofa. Fei p ^rma* fap gladius f^p homharda fep arcus fip sagitta telum fop hasta fup clypeus. AIv Concretum Spirituale EIv Anima OIv Angelas Vv Homo seu Concretum Compositiim. DEUS Sava^ id est, Causa prima. rpABULA ACCIDENTIUM. Sei8 Accidens Commune. SAs Causfa* sam efficiens 1. medium h. finis san materia h. forma saf auxilium 1. permissio h. impedi- mentum sab instrumentum sad preparans h. conservans sag ex&mplum sap occasio sat meritum sakfortuna h. consilium SHs iWoUi ejrieitnitru sriin independens h. dependens sin simplex h. compositum snf pertinere s>)b saZws h. periculum s»jd permanens li. mutabile s»!g habere h. carere s»!p vivere h. Twori S)it uices srjk ordinarium h. eMraordinariiim . SEs i^otri aigentiu sem incipere 1. continuare \\. finire sen repetere sef potentia seb debere sed oportere seg expedire HQ^ facile h. difficile set solere habitus sek spontaneitas h. violentia. Sis pntectio* sim bonum 1. indifferens h. malum sin p?ilchrum h. deforme sif pur um h. impurum sig M^i/e h. noxium ^v^ jucundum h. molestum sit aptum h. ineptum. GRAMMATICO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 17 sOs Consientanea r. iBisfssentan* som idem 1. diversum h. oppositum son respectivum h. absolutum sof privativum h. positivum sob consisfens h. inconsistens seu cow- tradictorium sod ac^io h. passio Hog suhjectum h. adjunctum sop cfc^ws 1. medium h. ohjectum sot substantia h. circumstantia. Srs ^ralrusi Ccimparatwnisf* SLun ua/c?e 1. mediocriter h. parum svn magis 1. ceque h. minus si>f mawime h. m,inime syb prius 1. simul h. posterius Sfd excessus 1. sa^is h. defectus. svs 3^eIatio ^umeru Sum unitas h. multitudo sun totum h. par* suf reliquum sub proportio sud orrfo sug commune h. proprium. Beis Accideiis Mathemati- cum. BAs ^ffertioned pn'mae* bam longum r. fereue ban latum r. augustum haf profundum r. breve, depressum bab rectum r. curvuin bad continuum r. discretum bag concavum r. conve,vum bap planum r. gibbosum. Bhs IBosJitio* b>]m perpendiculum 1. inclinans r. ja- cens hm parallelum 1. secans r. trans- versum b»jf rectus r. obliquus bjjb acutus r. obtusus b>!d incidens r, refractus bj5g directus r. rejlexus b»]p supinus r. pronus. BEs ^itUSl. bera distantia r. contiguitas ben supra r. iw/Va bef aw^e r. po5# beb dextra r. sinistra bed e.r^ra r. m^ra beg circundans bep extremum r. medium. Deis Physicum Generale. DAs ilajTito Communia* dam motus r. g-wie* dan tempus r, ceternitas daf prcBteritum 1. prcBsens v.futurum dab novum invenis r. aiitiqUicm dad /ocw* dag plenum r. vacuum dap prcesentia r. absentia. Dhs i^otri iHotusi* d?im gravitas r. levitas <\rin celeritas r. tarditas d?;f conatus d»!b vi* dTjd sustinere r. inniti drjg cedere r. resistere 18 LEXICON DEs iHotus; ^implejc* A&vajlectere den jacere (lef vertere deb trahere ded cadere r. surgere deg tollere r. deponere dep portare dek contrahere r. dilatare. Dis iHotui^ mm Contartu* dim C07icursu8 din fricatio dif terere dib premere did pulsio r. vulsio dig percutere dip sigillare, imprimere dit tegere dik pungere. DOs iiotusf ^eparang* dom scindere don frangere dof lacerate dob for are dod solvere r. ligare dog aperire r. claudere dop plicare r. eocplicare dot spargere r. colligere. Dts iHotusi ^aet^tttio* dum hcBrere dun tenere duf prehendere. Geis qualitas sensibilis. GAs Cartusf* gam caZor r. frigus gan humiditas r. siccitas gaf densitas r. rarias gab durities r. mollifies gad crastitias r. siihtilitaa gag arriditas r. lubricitas gap lentor r. friahilitas gat asperitas r. IcBvitas gak^uiditas r. consistentia. Ghs ^aboi% g>]m dwZce r. amarum gTjn pingue r. austerum grS insipidum r. salsum gTib acre r. acidum. GEs (S^^nn gem fragrans r. fcBtidus gen graveolentia. Gis ^onusf* gim artimdatus r. confusus gin ecAo gif acutus r. gravis gib fortis r. dehilis gid clarus r. obscurus gig asper r. cequabilis. GOs Colon gom Zm.?? r. tenehrce gon diaphanum r. opacum gof alburn r. nigrum, gohjlavum r. cceruleum god rubrum r. viride gog pallidum r. purpureum gop ccBsium r. fuscum,. Gts Communes; OTeftiones! misJtonim* gi>m mixtio GRAMMATICO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 19 gun fermentatio gvf temper amentum gub concretio gud concoctio gvg alteratio gi>p generatio r. corruptio. GVs Wntiont^ Wt^ttMlt^. gum nutritio r. fames gun fertilitas r. sterilitas guf pallulare gub crescere r. decrescere gud^rere r. marcescere gug sanitas r. morbus gup maturitas r. immaturitas. Pels Accidentia Sensitiva. PAs (ieneraliora* pam spirare pan vocem edere paf erfere r. bibere pab vigilare r. dormire pad sexus pag ma* gignere r. fcemina pap ^i6ic?o pat concipere r. parere pak educare. PHs iHotusf animalisi* p>im volare p^n natare p»jf serpere p>)b gradi p»!d ire r. venire p»!g salt are ^ri^ fugere r. *eg'Mi pr;t ducere p>!k discumbere r. surgere PES ^engus; JnUrnu pem cognoscere pen memoria pef phantasia peb appetitus ped volupius peg providentia r. experientia. Pis Jnrlmatio ^aturalis!* pim simplicitas r. sagacitas pin ferus r. wi^is pif gravis I. Zey^s pib constans r. mutabilis pid affabilis r. morosus pig sobrietas r. affectatio pip diligentia r. ignavia pit crudelitas r. misericordia pik gratitudo. POs ^asisfionfsi ^ruin'palesi^ pom admiratio pon a/wor r. odium pof sjaes r. metus pob gaudium r. IcBtitia pod ircr r, patientia pog pudor r. gloriatio pop cestimatio r. contemptus pot animositas pok liber alitas r. parsimonia. Pts pasi^icines mmusf ^Bniuijpalesf* pum pcBnitentia pun imitatio puf ^e^M* pub invidia r. commiseratio pud vindicta pug consternatio 20 LEXICON pup adulatio put cemulatio puk conctipiscentia. PVs iSasfs^ionum ^ffineef* pum curare pun expectare puf observare pub cavere pud attendere pug sinnilare pup svspicio put audere. SPAs CTfctud |3a£{gionum. Spam riders x.Jlere span canere r. plorare spaf ludere spab qucerela spad provocare spag placere r. offendere spap ^i« r. Concordia spat, insidiari spak fallere. sphs ^hi effectusf* sp»?m qucerere sp»;n invenire r. perdere sprjf offerre r. acceptare spTjb tradere r. recipere sp»)d sumere r. dimittere sp»)g luctari sp»)p labor ari r. otiari sprit lassitudo. Teis Accideiis Rationale. TAs actus! XnUIkftusi pn'mi* tarn ingenium tan conscientia taf citriosit as tab apprehensio perceptio tad astensus r. distensus tag judicium tap discursus tat meditatio tak machinatio. Ths eir ^n'misf (i^rti. t»5m supponere r. inferre tm addere r. subducere t»if multiplicare r. dividers tib probare tnd comparare tng mensurare t)ip conjicere tr,t includere r. excludere. TEs i^abitus! Jntellfctuales;* tern ar« ten scientia tef sapientia teb opinio ted intelligentia teg discretio. Tis Jntelkctufi! CjqpitiSsfici* tim affirmare r. negare tin Zo^wi r. scribere tif interpretari tib docere r. discere tid interrogare r. respondere tig narrare tip f am a tit dejinire r. distinguere tik restringere r. ampliare. TOs lignum* torn Zi^era 1. syllaba r. dictio GRAMMATICO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 21 ton nomen r. casus nominis io^Jigura tob genus 1. species r. individuum tod propositio r. oratio tog prosa r. carmen top periodus r. accentus tot sec^io caput tok regula r. ewceptio. Tts Woluntas;^ turn libertas r. coactio tun deliberatio r. determinatio tuf consensus r. dissensus tub virtus r. vitium tud electio r. rejectio tog optare tup credere r. dijffidere tut suscipere. TVs ^oluntatisf ejqpresJsiio* turn suadere r. dissuadere tun petere r. deprecari tuf benedicere r. maledicere tub hortari r. reprehendere tud laudare r. vituperare tug minari r. consolari tup imperare r. obedire tut consulere. STeis OEconomicum. STAs ^^elatw i^onim* stam ceremonia Stan civilitas r. rusticitas staf salutare r. valedicere 8tah jocare r. irridere stad comitari stag visitare stap tract are stat congratulari. sths Wana^ IBfiwminaticines; iB^rsmnanim et ilerum* st))m superior 1. csqualis r. inferior st)!n publicus r. privatus st»jf nobilitas honor r. plebeitas st>ib diviticE r. paupertas st>id vffl/or pretium st;]g lucrum r. damnum st)jp sumptus stjjt merces stjjk merx, STEs iRelatw ^ofutatisi. stem familia sten wa^io stef maritus steb cognatus r. affinis sted prowimus r. peregrinus steg hospes step familiaris stet amicus r. hostis stek creditor r. debitor. STis ilolri ^[fquirentii r. Ce- itenlii IBoininium* stim hcBreditdtio stin legatio stif donatio stib possessio stid habitatio stig prcescriptio. STOs Contrattus; stom tractare ston permutare stof emere r. vendere stob locare r. conducere stod deponere 22 LEXICON stog sponsionem facere stop accommodare. stum promittere r. prcsstare stun stipulare stu£ pigtie rare stvh Jidejubere stud solvere stug acceptillare stup condonare stut compensare. Keis Politicum. KAs iK^Iatio (9ffi(iu kam dominus r. servus kan rea? r. subditus kaf clericus r. laicus kab ^M^or r. pupillus kad legatus kag dwa? r. mi/e* kap consiliarius. Khs il^elatio (Z^ffffii m Subirusf* k»)m judex r. litigans k»jn patronus r. cliens k»jf ac^or r. rew* kjjb #e«^f* k»!d officialis. KEs SiOrin'orum iWaUn'a* kem re* r. persona ken «c/io causa kef jus r. factum keb /ea? ked titulus. Kis ^artesf ilitigantium* kim citare r. apparere kin allegare r. probare kif causam agere kib accusare r. e.vctisare kid appellate r. submittere kig confessio. KOs ^arUg Subinsi* kom decernere kon absolvere r. damnare kof punire r. parcere kob proscribere kod arrestare kog incarcerare kop confiscare. Kts Beluta* kum injuria kun furtum kvf fornicatio kub rebellio \ivdif actio kug hceresis kup crimen falsi kut proditio kuk incantatio KUs Bellum* kum invadere r. defendere kmi eoocubare kuf obsidere kub prceliari kud inducicB kug captivate kup spoliate kut vincere r. dedere. GRAMMATICO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 23 SKAs 3^eIigio r. ^upersititio* skam gratia r. natura skan feliciias r. miseria skaf colere r. profanare skab jurare skad orare r. laudare skag sacrificium skap sacramentum skat mysterium skak miraculum. Particulae Pronominales. lal e^ro lei i^/e lol Aic lul i^se lul qui. jTIe^iDitee; (§rammatirae : ^m-- ffula (0)rempla pro S^egulis! fta-- beantur nullam ejcreptionem patieittilbusf* Sim ^owz^ Radix, in Oratione partimla* slim indifferens medium srim malus oppositum simw honitas simmw bonitates. pone amans activum pono amatu passivum Sima bonus neutrum ponem/) amorosus et ax ponow/) amabilis ponow6 amandus ponewfe amaturus (Sratrug Comparatwnisf* simam valde bonus simaw mediocriier bonus simaf parum bonus simaft melior simad cBque bonus mnag minus bonus simaja optimus maat mediocriter bonus simak minime bonus. Sltnom^ Cempon'si tt Motiu T^onre facio amare ponesa amavi pones?) amaveram ponese amabam ponesi amo poneso amato ponoso amator (imperative) ponesu amare pono*u amari ponesai amanter T^onompai amabilifer. ^la IBeribatiba Compenbu Cauda* poneZ persona amans sunilli omnes personce ponor amatum vel res amata sunirri omnia vel res omnes nnjim magnus lapis nr]fif lapillus nnfind cumulus lapidum — oi E.ro- ticum ; Angloe Galloi. 24 LEXICON Etymologia Praecipuarum Particularum. Ab sod sam, hem ac t»if ad shod, brem adhuc sle7n, suhdan aliquis sum shun an tid ante hef apud hem, shumhem at shm, tyyif trimshaf aut trr,h, stom. Circum heg citra lolirib, shng contra shorn coram hef mrjssi cum slvb, dap, slam, sab cur lulsas. De srf, shop deinde shvhdan, sh^bsud denique shvbapdan deorsum br\shren. E ex san, bed ergo, lelsas, trnm et trif etiam tnf etsi #r,TO extra feed. Fere s^fshun, sjmshjf forte 50 A; . Hie loldad. Jam loldan ideo ZeZ«a« illic leldad in 6rerf, rfaw inter 6eTO, 6re^, ^u/» interdum shundan interim luldan, leldan, dlaf intra bred invicem snt, sum, sum ita tim, iterum seu, m item tnf juxta hrem, shumhem, shn, sos Magis «un. Nam sas, tnf. ne trim nimis «ud nimis-parum srud non trim nunc loldan. Ob sham, sas, shorn omnis «ww. Per sod, sam, sab, sag, slam, hrnn, blrin post shuh, href prae svn, bef praeter s^n, brnn prajterea tnf, svn, shub pro snt SOS, bef svb prope shvmhem, sufshun, shvmsuf propter sham, sas, sh^mmbem. Quam SMS tng quasi shn, ses qui vel quis lul quoque tnf, slvn. Satis slvd sed shom, trnf secundum sos shvmhem sine shng, drap, sof simul slvb sub dnd, shvb, bren super drnd, bren sursum bnshen GRAMMATICO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 25 supra ben. Tam slun, lolbes, lelbes tamen trimshaf, tr,m tandem sh^b^ dan bam tenus bns brem trans brrm shomieb. Versus 6>j* vel trnb vix shep. ullus av ut sham, slvn. Oratio Dominica. Paget lalla lul tim bred Nammi, 1. Tofu Inla skamroso. 2. Kanu Inla prr,- deso. 3. Tvsu Inla samoso ben Nom- mi, slvn ben Nammi. 4. Stifeso shod lain loldanve, Jlamu lalla danvesa. 5. Stupeso shod lalli strekku lalla, shn, lain st-jpesi shod strekkel lalla. 6. Trim priteso lain tr,dosj shom, sobreso lalli sod shimu ; sas, Kanu Sefu, tnnu tim Inla, loldan tnf sundan. Tuposo. CAP. I. DE PRIMIS SIGNORUM ELEMENTIS, SPECIATIM VERO DE SONIS SIMPLICIBUS. Artem primam maximeque neceflariam, Avtem Icil. Signorum, hucufque negle6tam, alias vero (quantum line hac poterant) ingeniofe et laboriofe excultas, inertisene genus liumanum accufabo ? Anne potius Numinis fpe- ciali Decreto, Artem banc tantas in rebus bumanis mutationes porten- dentem, in ultima Mundi tempora refervante, exeufabo? Artem igitur banc ab aliis non inventam, mihi vero vere repertam patefafturus, a primis ejus Elementis Literis fc. exordium dueam ; earumque Philofophiam pau- cis et perfpieuetradam. Optime meruit de genere liumano, qui primus docuit voces humanas in quofdam iimpliciffimos primes et irrefolubiles fonos refolvere ; quam In- ventionem certiffimum eft praeceffiffe Inventionem Literarum Alpbabeti- carum, quam nos vulgo miramur; hae enim nihil funt aliud quam Signa Signorum, id eft Ibnorum, adeoque illis neceflario pofteriora. Non qui- dem dico banc Inventionem omnem Literarum ufum prajceffilTe ; nam non minus certum videtur ufum Cbara6terum,quatenusRerum ipfarum et mentis Conceptuum immediate fignifieativi funt, ante banc prius longe cognitum fuifle : Imo judico ufum Literarum hoc fenfu fuiffe ab initio, licet homines in materia folida et ad figuras confervandas apta nondum fcribebant : qui enim caput nutat, oculo connivet, digitum movet in aere, &c. (ad mentis cogitata exprimendum) is non minus vere fcribit, quam qui Literas pingit in Charta, Marmore, vel sere. Ratio cur judicem Charaaercs cxtitifTe ab 28 ARS SIGNORUM. initio, eft quod non minus naturale lit liomini communicare inFiguris quam So7iis : quorum utrumque dico homini naturale ; licet fcribere has vel illas figuras, vel loqui has vel illas voces, lit omnino ad placitum. Praeterea Cha- rafteres Reales fuifle in ufu ante Charaderes Vocales, Synenfes et^gyptios, populos antiquiffimos teftes compello. Sonorum fimplicium numerus et differentiae, a diverfo modo aperiendi et claudendi Organa pronunciationis petenda funt ; quare primo dividi pof- funt Literal, in apertas et claiisas. Apertae principaliores (non enim eft animus differentias minutiores per- fequi) funt feptem ; quarum valor, ordo, et foni differentia videantur fupra. Hae iterum funt Gidturaks vel Labiales. Gutturales funt quatuor, quarum pronunciatio gradatim procedit, a fono maxime aperto «; per fonum paulo contra6tiorem 7i ; et tertio e adhuc contradiorem, et gutture ftridiore pro- latum ; ad quartum i fonum contraftiffimum, et ftriftiffimo gutture forma- tum, ideoque acutiffimum. Labiales funt tres ; quas lie voco quod line labio- rum ope et motu formari nequeunt. Harum o eft maxime aperta, hoc eft contra6tionem labiorum minime pofcit ; ^ contraftiora labia in iplius for- matione requirit; ic maximam labiorum contradionem et conatum poftulat. Quot modis hi foni limplices coalefcere poffunt in dipthongos, non mora- bor curiofe inquirere : Hoc tantum teneatur, fex elfe dipthongos fonatu et diftinftu faciles, ni. ai ei oi au eu ou, qui efferri polfunt continuato fpiritu, ad modum unius limplicis foni : et ratio hujus eft, quia componuntur ex fonis maxime apertis praecedentibus, et maxime contradis fequentibus ; ideoque facilis eft cadentia organorum eodem fpiritu in his formandis. Literse claulis organis formatae principaliores et omni populo pronunci- atu faciles, et quibus folis idcirco hie ufurus fum, funt duodecim : Hae dividuntur in semiclausas et perfecte clausal. Literae semiclausce quae et semivocales appellari polfunt, funt tres ; srlm quibus formandis organa oris non clauduntur perfe6te, fed continuatur Ipiritus tranfpiratio per os ; et ex varia percuffione palati per linguae ex- tremitatem (quae organum pronunciationis praecipuum eft) formantur. S formatur per conta6tum palati et laterum linguae, media parte lin- guae a contadu abftinente ; per quam tanquam per fiftulam, fpiritus fono fibilo emittitur. De fono hujus Literae audivi virum dodum hoc pecu- ARS SIGNORUM. 29 Hare obfervantem, quod nequeat efferri fono claro, fed ad modum susurri: quod quidem verum eft, fed non de hac litera fola ; nulla enim eft litera afpirata ex tribus mutis, quae fono claro proferri poteft. Ut hoc diftinc- tius percipiatur, confulo ut inter pronunciandum diu haereatur in harum literarum formatione : et fic obfervabit ingeniofus quilibet, licet altiffima voce exclamet, proferendo vocem ex his literis et vocalibus conflatam, dum fonat vocales fonus erit clarus ; fed cum ad has literas fonandas per- venitur, ftatim fonus clarus vanefcit in fufurrum, e. g. as with life. Sonus r eft fortis vibratio extremitatis linguae contra palatum ; hinc eft quod qui nervos linguae liabent debiles, non facile formant hunc fonum. L, formatur modo contrario quo >S', extremitate fcil. ling-uae palatum tangente, lateribus vero a contaftu abftinentibus, ut tranfmittatur fpiritus. Hie notetur : nihil me unquam magis vexavit, quam invenire veram dif- ferentiam inter literas n et /; auribus enim percipiebam fonos diftin6tiffi- mos, at vero in organorum conta6bu, unde omnem fonorum differentiam exoriri fatis fciebam, vix quidem ac ne vix, per multos dies differentiam ullam obfervare potui ; faltem quam defcribere poteram. Verum ex jam diftis et ftatim dicendis fatis clare defcribi poteft harum literarum dif- ferentia; in formatione enim I fpiritus per os tranlmittitur, in n per nafum. Soni perfede claufi funt novem, qui dupliciter fubdividi poffunt ; vel primo, ratione diverfitatis organorum quibus formantur ; et fic in tres ter- narios numeros dividuntur, labiates m h p, linguales ndt^ et giithirales f g k. Vel fecundo, diftingui poflunt fecundum diverfitatem foni editi in iis for- mandis ; fecundum quam differentiam ego eas hie difpofui, utpote inftitu- to meo accommodatiorem ; et fic funt vel Nasales feu Transpirantes m nf, vel Suffbcatce h d g, vel Mutes p t k : Nam ratione organorum pronuncia- tionis praecife, tres tantum funt literae perfe6te claufa* ; fed hae tres clau- furae multiplicatae per trinam differentiam foni faciunt novem. Nasales ideo fic voco, quod dum organa oris clauduntur, continuatur fonus per emiffionem fpiritus per nares ; claufis enim naribus, hae literae formari nequeunt. De his tri^ hie monenda funt. Primo ex hac natural! et genuina fonorum analyfi detegi (vel faltem confirmari) literam feu fo- num vere fimplicem dari, quae vulgo per duas literas diverforum organ- F 30 ARS SIGNORUM. orum, ideoque in eadem fyllaba minime unibilium, abfurde fcribitiir : Hie enim fonus ex natura rei ipiius, non minus facilis ell vel in principio vel fine vocis fine alia confonante, quam aliae duae litera? nafales m et n ; licet refpeftu noftri non ita lit ; nam nos nihil facile facimus nili quod faepe fa- cimus. Secundo, cum in vulgaribus nollris Unguis nullum habeamus Charaderem limplicem ad exprimendum liujus foni valorem, ideo mu- tuatus fum Charaderemyad Imnc fonum lignificandum. Tertio, propter banc caufam Charaderem f pro dido fono fubllitui, quia hie mihi pro- politum eft omnibus modis facilitati confulere, (quae etiam caufa fuit, quod omnes alios fonos limplices rejeeerim ; quia pauci vel nulli eorum funt, qui facile pronunciantur ab omnibus populis, fed apud varios populos ad- modum varius eft eorum ufus) ideoque hunc fonum, licet perfediffimum et diftindilfimum ab aliis ; cum tamen a nullo populo cujus literse ad nos per- venerunt lit ulitatus, nili ante fuffocatum vel mutum fui organi (et tunc qui- dem Charadere proprio non feribitur; Graeci enim per y ayyiXog', aliae gentes per n ut langim\ anger) ideo inquam, hune fonum ex liae lingua ejeei, cujus loco fubftitui literamyj facilis et diftindi foni. Si tamen aliter vifum fuerit viris dodis, poterit retineri fonus proprius literoe gutturalis Trampirantis, feu Nasalis fub Charadere foni/! SuffocatcB b dg formantur eadem claufura organorum qua Nasaies ; fed fpiritu magno nifu retento et fupprelTo in gutture. Hie notetur literam g, ut vulgo in Georgius fonatur, non elfe literam limplicem, fed compolitam ex d et sh, quali dshordshius. Literae Mutce formantur eadem claufura organorum qua fupra didae ; fed omni interno fpiritus motu et fono celTante poft organorum claufuram fadam. Praeter has duodeeim eonfonantes principales jam enumeratas, omnibus hominibus organa illaefa habentibus pronunciatu faciles, quibufque folis (ut dixi) ideo hie ufurus fum, alii funt foni limplices ex his orti, ni. ex afpiratione didarum suffocatarum et mutanim oriuntur fex ; vfex bp ; ill ut fonatur in the et tithe^ ex d ; th ut fonatur in thrice^ ex t ; gh (qui fonus eft germanicus) ex g ; et % ex k. De his notandum primo, quafdam ha- rum afpiratarum, licet duabus charaderibus defcriptas, efl^e tamen revera ARS SIGNORUM. 31 fimplices fonos non minus quam f et v quae unico chara6bere fcribuntur. Secundo, Nationes exterse male accufant nos Britannos hlcBsitatis dum li- teras d ^t t afpirate pronunciamus ; qui foni illis duriffimi funt. Sic po- pulo Anglicano viciffim peculiare eft, abhorrere a gutturalibus afpiratis. Corrumpit etiam, ut plurimum, fonos a et /, quaft e et ai: non tamen omnino refpuunt Angli fonos a et i:, familiares enim fatis illis funt hi foni, licet diverfis chara6teribus notati ; a enim per aw fcribunt, et i per ee, ut law^ saw, peel, /eel. Contigit aliquando verba habere cum curiofo quodam rerum naturalium [caufas] fcrutatore, qui caufam varietatis hujus fonorum apud diverfos popu- los, cceli folique temperiem affignabat. Non quidem diffiteor caufas natu- rales effe operativas in fonorum diverlitate ; verum caufae proximiores reddi polfunt, quam regionum temperies, ni. corporis temperamentum, quod faepiffime plus diverlitatis producit in hominibus in eodem loco natis, quam videmus inter alios in diverfis mundi climatibus. Quare hoc cer- tum eft, caufas naturales variare fonos quoad eorum modulationem ; hoc eft, quod ftnt graviores, clariores, afperiores, &c. at vero adfcribere cau- fam differentiae fonorum, qui ex diftindis organorum claufuris et con- taftibus oriuntur, vel regionis, vel corporis ipfius temperamento, eft re- vera ignorantiam verse caufae differentiarum fonorum prodere : mihi enim experientia comprobatum eft, poffe Anglos gutturales afpiratas fatis dif- tinde pronunciare, ut etiam alios Populos gutturales linguales. Nulla igitur ratio reddi poteft, cur Angli averfantur fonum x, exterae nationes vero th, quam cur Angli vocant urbem town, aliae Nationes aliis vocibus. Z eft /S' fuffocatum ; hoc eft, differt ah s ut d & t vel bap, &c. Eft et alius fonus fimplex, qui paululum differt ab s, qui vulgo fcribitur sk : Hebraei proprio Charadere notant CJt qui etiam dupliciter fonatur, ni. muto et suffocato fono ; unde oritur duplex litera, cujus fonus siiffocatus nobis Britannis non eft ufitatus, fed ni fallor Polonis familiaris. Tota effentia literae h confiftit in forti fpiritus impulfu in vocalium pro- latione, five id fiat fpirando, five refpirando ; et haec de fonorum fimpli- cium numero et principalioribus differentiis. Quemadmodum foni fimplices aperti coalefcunt in unum fonum conti- nuatum, qui dicitur dipthongus, fie claufi faepiffime in unum continuatum 32 ARS SIGNORUM. fonum in eadem fyllaba coalefcunt : quare explicatis fonis limplicibus claufis, quafdam regulas de earum compofitione tradam ; ni. de principa- lioribus fonis Compofitis, ut monui de dipthongis. Primo, Haec eft Regiila certa et univerfalis : Nulla litera unius organi naturaliter prsecedere poteft literam alterius organi, in principio lyllabae. Hinc excipiatur s quae ante quamvis aliam in principio fyllaboe, vel poft quamvis aliam in fine fyllabac fatis euphonice Ibnat, licet in nulla (quod fciam) lingua, fuffocatis b dg praeponatur, quod propterea nee ego hie feci. Raro etiam invenitur ante r ; Analogia tamen hujus Linguae coegit me in quibufdam vocibus componere sr : videbam enim fonum in fe fatis eflTe euplionicum et facilem. Lingua etiam Anglica admittit r poft sh, fonum s maxime affinem, et quidem multo duriorem, ut shrewd, shrine. Videbi- tur fortaffis sf{uhi per^jam intelligo gutturalem tiasakm) fonus non na- turalis : verum ut fupra demonftravi /" folitarie fonari poffe in principio fyllabae, non minus quam m n ; ftc etiam compofitio sf non minus eft na- turalis, quam sm sn. Secundo, In fine fyllabae Nmales euplionice valde fonant ante suffocatas vel mutas ejufdem organi ; ut lamb, lamp, and, ant, long, ink. Ubi notan- dum in long et ink non n fonatur, nee quidem fonari poteft, fed guttur- alis Nasalis. Durus tamen eft Germanorum fonus componentium JVasa- km suffocatam et mutam in eadem fyllaba ; ut handt, landt. Tertio, SemiclauscB r I bene componuntur in principio fyllabae cum sit^o- catis et mtiiis, quae compofitio mihi in fequentibus magni eft ufus : durius tamen paululum fonat / poft d et t, quia eadem fere (ut didum) claufura organorum formantur. Et licet analogia hujus linguae poftulat fonum / componi cum d et t, tamen evenit in ifta parte Lexici quae fub d et t eft, paucas notiones habere proprie diftum medium cujus / eft charaderifticum. Quarto, r et / in fine fyllabae ante quamvis aliam confonantem bene fonantur, fed poft nullam. Jamque dodrinam de fonis limplicibus cum his obfervationibus abfolvam. Primo, Omnium Linguarum Grammaticae in Literarum numero vel de- fedivac funt, vel redundantes ; quofdam enim fonos complexos unico cha- radere, alios vero fonos vere fimplices duobus charaderibus notant. ARS SIGNORUM. 33 Secimdo, Nulla ante-hac ratio Oi^dinis literaruni reddita eft ; fed non minus fortuitus eft ordo literarum quam inftitutio vocum. Tertio, Ex convenientia quam videmus refpe6tu method! in omnibus Alphabetis, manifeftum eft literarum Inventionem unicum Autorem lia- buifte ; Literse enim A B primum locum obtinent in Alphabetis omnium Linguarum. Quod ordo fequentium Literarum variet, ratio eft, partim quod qusedam literae poftea additae funt poft primam inventionem ; quse- dam etiam a quibufdam Gentibus eliminatae funt cum quilibet populus literas recipiens Linguae fuse adaptavit : aliae funt variationes in numero et ferie literarum apud varias nationes ex aliis accidentibus, quarum caufas reddere eft difficile. Quarto, Ex fonorum Analyfi hie tradita fatis intelleda, ftatim fequitur eorum recordatio. Quinto, Priufquam caput hoc de fonis abfolvero, docebo ex fupra difta analyfi Artem (quod quibufdam forte non ingratum erit) tranfmutandi voces cujufvis Linguae in alias diverfiftimas, et tamen fermo ftc tranfmu- tatus eandem gratiam et euphoniam retinebit ; adeo ut facillime difcerni poftet, qua lingua quis utatur, licet fenfus verborum maneat omnino oc- cultus, etiam ab iftarum linguarum peritis. Ars breviter haec eft. Fiat commutatio labialium mh j) cum dentalibus n d t ; quod etiam fiat in earum afpiratis ; et commutatio g cum k, et r cum / ; exemplum, Pipile pu tapurcB kgudams siid pehiime thaki. Syrthesplen pemue Niisam nehipalis athema, i. e. Tityre tu patulcB, Sfc. Nemo linguae Latinae gnarus, dum audit has voces rede prolatas, qui non fatis percipiet eas effe Latinas, licet ita inverfas ut nihil intelligat ex iis. 34 ARS SIGNORUM. CAP. II. DE CHARACTERIBUS. QuEMADMODUM fcientia transfertur a liomine ad hominem per organum auris, mediantibus fonis, lie etiam per oculi organum mediantibus figuris. Poteft fieri communicatio per reliquos fenfus; led tardius, ideoque ad noftrum inftitutum nihil pertinet, qui medium communicationis breviffi- mum et rationi maxime conlentaneum quaerimus. Si comparatio inllitu- atur inter ligna vocalia et sciipta, communicatio in sonis multo eft expedi- tior inter prsefentes ; fed banc vincit communicatio jyerjiguras, quod, cum voa; perit litera scripta manet. Per figuras enim communicari poteft inter abfentes, et ad quamvis diftantiam ; et quod praecipuum eft, rerum memo- riam praefervant. Hie diligenter eft advertendum quod eadem lit Ars lignorum audihilium et visibilium : quot modis enim componi polTunt (fecundum regulas Artis) fignrae ftmplices, et rebus lignificandis imponi, tot modis et eadem prorfus Arte, componi poflunt et variari foni limplices. Veritatem banc ulterius lie demonftro. Ubi Ars ibi Methodus, ubi methodus ibi numerus, ubi numerus ibi aptitudo, ut res numeratae fecundum ordinem numericum vel figuris vel vocibus fignificentur : quod fatis eft evidens ex fignis numericis, a me in hoc opere traditis. Hoc noto propter imperitiam eorum (pro quo errore etiam homines do6li funt increpandi) qui Artem Signorum in midis figuris^ hoc eft Characterem Universalem (ut vulgo appellari folet) mirantur, fed de lingua nova audire non ferunt : cum tamen nemo Artem commu- nicandi per figuras tradere poteft, quin eadem Charaderis praecepta fmt eadem ratione fonis applicabilia. Hoc quidem meipfum diu latuit, poft- quam detexerim banc Artem in figuris : et licut incredibile videbatur fuf- ceptum meum primum de Chara6bere muto, non folum vulgo fed plurimis viris dodis ; hoc vero fecundum adhuc magis fidem fuperabat, etiam mul- torum quibus abunde fatisfaftum erat de Arte figurarum. ARS SIGNORUM. 35 Quamobrem hoc non me adeo movet, quod pauci apprehendant Artem Sonm-um et Figicrarum eflTe omnino eandem ; eft enim hoc Artis Myfte- rium fatis arduum. Sed admodum molefte fero, quod videam omnes fere homines una voce Charaderem Realem et Mutum expetentes, dum vero de Lingua audiunt, ab hac ut a vano et lliperfluo Commento abliorrent ; quafi Linguarum confufio nuUo alio pado efTet reparabilis, nifi exfcin- dendo omnium hominum Linguas, ut folis miitis Charaderibus fieret com- municatio. An non qui legit hunc librum, habet me ipfi communicantem animi mei fenfa in Charaftere 3Iuto ; non enim audit meas voces f Sed dicet, hie Character eft effahilis. Verum quidem eft. An propterea pejor et minus defiderabilis ? An voces aures offendunt ? Si in fignis inartifici- alibus (qualia ftmt voces omnium Linguarum) detur relblutio sononim in fgura.% et figumrum rurftis in sonos, quae Ars eft egregia et utiliffima, quanto magis debet ha^c perfeftio reperiri in Signis Artificialibus ? Roga- rem cui fini vel bono expetitur Character Realis Mutus f Si dicatur ad communicandum cum hominibus diverfa? Lingucs, conlentio. Et ego hanc Artem hie doceo, longe compendiofius et facilius quam unquam cogi- tatum erat ab iis qui eam inter Literaturae defiderata numerarunt, et quam eft poffibile ut fiat in tali Charadere qui in sonos non fit relblubilis. At dices, hie Linguam doceo. Refp. Si alicui non placuerit communicare per hanc artem in vocibm, compefcat Linguam, et obturet Aures, et fie com- municare poterit in folis mutis jiguris : ego enim nullam aliam differentiam agnofco inter quemvis Charaderem (Arte) excogitabilem ad communican- dum, et Linguam. Ratio autem quod homines adeo prayudiciis laborant contra Linguam novam, et Charaderem mutum mirantur, eft prime partim propter famam Charaderis Universalis feu Realis, quo nomine indigitata fuit haec Ars ab iis qui de Literaturae defideratis traftarunt. Secunda hujus rei ratio (quae etiam reddi poteft ratio cur viri dodi nihil vel parum dixerunt de Lingua Philofophica, defiderata Artis enumerantes) eft propter ignorationem hujus egregiae veritatis ; quod quicquid prseftari poteft in Jiguris, idem eadem Arte praeftari poteft in sonis, ut fupra oftenfum eft. Tertio, vulgus plus novitatem et Raritatem Artium admirari folet, quam veritatem : communi- 36 ARS SIGNORUM. care autem per figna mere muta^ eft quid novum et rarum ; per Jiguras in sonos refolubiles eft ordinarium. Suadebant mihi Rei Literariae amici et etiam mei, Artem banc primo in Mutis Characteribus exbibere, Linguam reticendo ; quo liominum curio- fitati, ex rei omnimoda novitate magis placerem, atque fie ipfos ad ejus ftudium facilius allicerem. Verum hie non videbatur mihi bonus dolus, propter banc rationem. Certum quidem eft tantum efte hominis atriosi- tatem, ut ad res novas et raras^ quodam quafi curiofitatis ardore et flamma omnes advolent : verum non minus certum eft, fastidium quoddam occu- pare mentes humanas poft vifas res novas et eMraordinarias, nifi itsus aliquis in illis pereipiatur. At vero in iis rebus, quarum usus ipfas plus commen- dat quam novitas, licet homines tanto impetu in illas non ferantur, atta- men cum mus fit bonum permanem et perpetuum, novitas vero cito transiens, fi non tam avide eas ampledantur, amplexas tamen majori cum voluptate retinent. In duobus autem demonftro ulum LingucB, id eft facilitatem communicationis, majorem efle quam fi in folo nmto Charadere banc Ar- tem patefecifTem. Primo, Nulla fiibfidia mnemonica haberi poterant ad Charafteres Radicales memoriae imprimendos, quae hie valde memoriam adjuvant. Secundo, In Charadere folo patefaciendo oportebat noxasfgu- ras formare, quae licet paucae admodum fuerant, et eadem Arte unibiles ad unicum perfe6lum Charafterem conftituendum, qua hie literae ad unam vocem faciendam, tamen aliquid oneris memoriae neceftario fecum attu- lifTent : hie vero, retinentur Charaderes prius noti omnibus Europae populis. Cum igitur (ut di6tum) Ars Charaderis et Smiorum eadem fit, omnino par erat et rationi conlentaneum, ut quod facilius erat primo proponeretur : qui enim Lingiice ufiim prius calluerit, pofium ilium Charaderis Artem fpatio unius horae docere. Quare cum ex hac Arte usum vere intendam, hac Methodo Docendi ufiis fiim, utpote fini meo maxime accommodate ; ideoque imprefentiarum de Charaderis Arte nihil plus addam, nifi quod, ficut deledum feci sonorum simplicissimorum et maxime euphonicorum, fie etiam Charaderes erunt simplicissimi et figurae pulchrae et uniformes : nullae erunt caudae dependentes, nulli apices eminentes. ARS SIGNORUM. 37 CAP. III. DE RERUM SERIE PR^DICAJVIENTALI. Absoluta Do6lrina de primis Signorum Elementis, quantum prcefentis Inftituti ratio poftulabat, et brevitas linebat, priufquam accedam ad signa integra, ex his componendum, rebusque ipfis imponendum, neceffarium erit Rerum iplarum naturas paululum introfpicere : hoc enim eft malum, cui remedium quserimus in aliis Linguis, quod prima nomina Rerum omnino fortuito, et fine ullo confilio vel relpe6lu habito ad res ipfas pro quibus fup- ponuntur, lint impofita. Cum enim Signa a nobis pro Rebus ipfis fuppon- antur, omnino rationi confentaneum eft, ut Ars Signwum Artem Rerum fequatur. Et ficut judico MetapJiysicam et Logicam unicam tantum con- ftituere Artem, fie Grammatica non aliter vel plus differt ab his, quam Sigmim a Signato ; cumque haec correlata fint, omnino eorum eadem de- bet efTe feientia. Quare, qui cum Ratione Noinina Rebus imponere velit, primo oportet in Chaos iftud Mundi Idealis in animo exiftentis, per quafi creationem Logicam, formam, pulchritudinem, et ordinem introducere ; quo fado facile erit ejus partes Nominibus aptis appellare. Sicut enim manus piftoris in fculpendis Imaginibus, per internam Mentis Ideam ex objefto extrinfecus vifo genitam, regitur, fie Grammaticus, fecundum Ideas et Regulas Logicas a Rerum ipfarum natura extrinfecus exiftentium petitas, Nomina illis imponere debet. Haec autem ordinata Series Rerum vulgo dici folet PrcBdicamentum : De quo in genere pauca hie dicenda funt. Opinio eft quorundam hujus Saeculi Scriptorum, qui in quibufdam Phi- lofophise partibus Inventores, in om.nibus vero Reformatores fe ja6lant, nullum effe ufum Doctrince prcsdicamentalis ; hoc eft re vera, ftridam Me- thodum in Artibus docendis non elTe neceffariam : quo nihil abfurdius et Philofopho indignius doceri poteft. Quo enim tendunt omnium Philofo- phorum conatus in variis Philofophise partibus, nifi eo, ut Rerum naturas aperiant, differentias et convenientias fcrutando, ficque, Methodo et ordine G 38 ARS SIGNORUM. inter fe collocando et difponendo ? Quod poftquam praeftitum fuerit in par- ticularibus Scientiis et Artibus, tunc officium eft Logici, has fparfas Phi- lofophiae partes in inferioribus facultatibus ab aliis tra6tatas colligere, eaf- que legitima fubordinatione in unum Syftema componere ; quod rede ap- pellari poteft Prcedicamentum, feu Retiim omnium series ordinata. Non mirum eft igitur hos Autores in tam faedos errores fuifte lapfos, dum fe- riem prsedicamentalem revera inutilem, nobis obtrudera velint. Quis Philofoplius a rifu continebit, cum audiveritduo efte Summa genera Rerum, Corpm fcil. et Non Cwpm. Dicerem hos homines Manichceos, nifi fe Sa- duccBOs aperte profiterentur. Solent hi Terminis Artis, et vocibus ad res iignificandas a fenfu et corporeo contadu remotas impofitis, ut abfurdis et infignificantibus irridere ; cum tamen nulla detur vox magis abfurda et infignificans, quam non-corpus quaa illis fummum Genus conftituit. Roga- rem hos, quid illis fignificat haec vox Deus f Certe, nili fibi aperte contra- dicant, eft vox absurda et inskpiificans ; nuUo enim corporeo contadu, ipfis fatentibus, ad naturam Divinam perveniri poteft. Quandoquidem probabile admodum fit, Libellum hunc ad multorum liominum dodorum manus perventurum, ideo placuit hie paucis inferere Rationes, propter quas feclufa fide ex Dei Revelatione, his duabus Maxi- mis (et quideni niihi aliarum omnium primis) veritatibus ipfe affentiam. 1. Effe Deum. 2. Animam Ilunianam effe Immortalem. Hocque eo li- bentius facio, quod videam maximam audaciam Mortalitatis affertorum hoc fermento plurimos corrupifTe ; et quofdam Autores Magni Nominis, hoc Argnmentum leviter admodum tradaffe. Primo, propter naturae voceni in omnibus liominibus Numen fufpicien- tem et invocantem, ulterius ftc colligo efte Deum. Effe Caufam primam eft prima Veritas ; ergo eft prima Veritas efle Deum : Causa enim prima et Deus mihi idem fignificant. Verum Secundo, Animam Humanam effe Immortalem^ quod magis dubitatur et apertius contradicitur a multis (licet revera qui hoc negant per necefTariam confequentiam Dei exiftentiam etiam negant) fie licet colligere. Nulla potentia Materialis et Mortalis elevari poteft ad Deum Immaterialem et Imynortakm apprehendendum et contemplandum ; fed anima humana ele- vatur ad Deum apprehendendum et contemplandum, ideoque etiam appe- ARS SIGNORUM. 39 tendum et ut fuo fummo bono fruendum ; ergo non eft Materialis et Mor- talis, fed germen et propago Divinae Naturae : cui optime confentiunt S. Script, phrafes, Animam appellando Dei Imaginem, Candelam Domini, et Deum Patrem Spirituum. Minor hujus Argumenti patet, nee ab adver- fariis negatur ; Ratio MaJDris eft, quod inter omnem Adum et Objedum intercedere debet naturae proportio : quod etiam principiis immcyrtaUtatis adverfariorum eft confentaneum, dum decent Mentem corpoream res in- corporeas apprehendere non pofle. Renatus Des Cartes, vir in multis ingenioliffimus, videtur mihi hoc Ar- gumentum tradans, fundamentum jeciffe in arenis ; magno enim apparatu verborum, et lingularem Methodum aifedans, ad banc veritatem demon- ftrandum procedit ; cujus tamen Argumenta mihi potius dulces phantafiae vel Meditationes (ut ipfe loquitur) quam rigidae Demonftrationes videntur. Primum et maximum ejus Argumentum ad banc veritatem evincendam, tale eft. Poffum ego fupponere, nihil exiftere extra me, vel Deum, vel Coelum, vel Terram ; vel me habere manus, pedes, oculos, &c. et tamen omnibus his remotis, manet verum ego Cogito, ergo etiam hoc, ego Sum. Miror neminem hujus fuppofitionis fallaciam detexiffe : eft enim non minus implicatoria quam haec. Suppono nihil corporeum exiftere extra me, tamen verum manet, ego video, ego audio : omnis enim Actus tam S'piritualis quam corpm'eus neceffario supponit objectum. Et qui per ftip- pofitionem tollit objectum, neceffario tollit et ipftim actum ; qui enim cogitat, de aliquo cogitet neceffe eft, non minus quam qui videt, audit, neceffe eft objectum aliquod his facultatibus proportionatum habeat. Si quis ad banc ftippolitionem fulciendam diceret, poffe Animam ha- bere pro cogitationis objecto seipsam : Ad hoc Refp. 1. veriffimum eft, animam poffe ftiper ftios adus diredos refledere, hoc eft fcire fe fcire : et hoc fecundum eft meum principale Argumentum pro Animce Im- mortalitate, iic enim arguo. Sicut prime, ilia Natura, quae ad Deum contemplandum, appetendum et fruendum elevatur, neceffe eft Immaterialis et Immortalis fit ; Sic fe- cundo, ilia Natura quae ftiper ftios Adus refledere poteft, et fe contem- plare, neceffe eft banc Naturae Divinae participem effe : fed Anima, &c. Ratio Majoris eft, quod fit perfedio foli Naturae Divinae competens, fe 40 ARS STGNORUM. contemplare, appetere et frui : Ilia enim Natura quae poteft fuper fe re- fleftere, fe appetere et frui, nulla alia re exiftente, eft Deus. Quare cum Anima poffit fuper fe refleftere, (licet non in fupra di6ta fuppofitione, iic enim elTet revera Deus) certum eft lianc potentiam efl'e partem Imaqinis DivincE. Sed fecundo, quid hoc ad di6tam fuppofitionem fulciendam, quod Anima poffit de fe cogitare ? Omnis enim Actus Refleanis (in Creatura) fupponit actum directum fuper quem refledit : omnis actus directus dicit effentialem refpedum ad ohjectum eMrinsecm exiftens. Qui igitur per fuppofttionem toUit omnia objecta extrinseca, is etiam actum directum omnem tollit ; qui adum directum tollit, is etiam actum refiexum, cum actus directus fit actus rc- flexi ohjectum. Actus autem Rejlexus puru^, fine omni fuppofitione prioris Actus directiy eft folius Dei. Quare fupponere Animam, nulla alia re ex- iftente, de fe cogitare pofTe, eft fupponere impoffibile ; vel Animam effe Deum, quod eft adhuc magis impoffibile. Tertio, Neque verba ipfa Autoris patiuntur liunc fenfum ; explicans enim fe quid intelligat per vocem coffitare, dicit effe, hoc velle, illud nolle, de alio dubitare, &c. qui aftus aperte referuntur ad objecta externa, quae modo per fuppofitionem fuftulerat. Si dicat quis, quomodo dici pofTunt ilia principia prima notiffima et veriffima, de exiftentia Dei et Animae Immortalitate, cum ea homines do6bi habeant pro falfiffimis ? Refp. Hos homines loqui vel ex pravo affeftu vel effe Mente captos. Sed quis ita mente captus, ut notiffima et prima principia neget ? Imo, vidi aliquando homines morbo corporeo laborantes, dum alios loquentes audiebant, et intuebantur, tamen negaffe fe vel videre, vel audire, et quanto clarius proponebatur iis objectum, tanto magis ne- gabant fe lentire. Sic contigit infanientem Atheum, dum conceptus clariffimos de Deo format, tunc ftrenuiffime hoc idem negare. Sed hi homines multum fapientiac in aliis rebus manifeftant. Sic contigit ali- quando quofdam homines abfurde et ridicule de una aliqua re fentire, in aliis tamen fatis fapere. Sed ne diutius a propofito digrediar, fummam didorum in banc brevem circularem ratiocinunculam colligo, quae mihi principia prima et notiffima continet (cum fcil. non fenfum, fed redae rationis duftum fequor) quaeque ARS SIGNORUM. 41 ad omnia Atheorum Sophifmata diluenda fufficiunt ; Aut ego sum Immor- talis^ aut Deus non est, — ^ut Deus est, aut ego nihil sum : jamque ad prcedi- camentum redeo. Et inteiTogo illos qui prcedicamenti nullum ufum vident, quid fignificent hse voces genus, species, differentia, definitio, &c. ? Certe, fine praedicamenti fuppofitione funt omnino abfurdae et nihil lignificantes : omnis enim de- monstratio lupponit definitioncm, definitio genus et speciem, genu^ et species ordinatam seriem PrcBdicamentalem. Et quidem fi proprie loqui velimus, nulla eft definitio vel demonstratio (licet Autorum fcripta his vocibus abun- dent) quia nulla eft conftituta series prcBdicamentalis : hinc eft, quod quae habetur definitio ab uno, non merebitur descriptionis nomen (ut vulgo dif- tinguunt) ab alio ; fie quod huic eft demonstratio, illi eft Sophisma. Jecit Ariftoteles quaedam rudia fundamenta prcsdicamenti, et nos nihil vel parum fiiperftruximus. Pofiiit ille pro fiio arbitrio decern Sunima Genera Rerum, quafdam notiones quae fiib his comprehendi nequibant, Transcendentes et EMravagantes appellando ; ex quibus duo alia prcedica- menta eadem ratione et Autoritate conftituere potuiflet. Ratio quod haec rerum ordinatio difpliceat, eft primo, quod non fatis accurate diftinguat Rerum notiones ; cum eadem notio saepiflime diverfis refpedibus, ad diverfa prcedicamenta referri poteft, Qualitatis, Actionis, Relationis, &c. Secundo, quod in refta ordinata serie Rerum, nullae ftint notiones Transcendentes ad- mittendae, nifi genera refpeftu specierum et individuorum, Transcendentia quis dicere velit. Qui enim notiones Transcendentes ullo alio fenfu ad- mittunt, contradicunt prcedicamenti definitioni ab ipfis traditae, ni. quod fit Series Rerum svh uno summo genere contentarum. Eft igitur lecundum hanc definitionem, fola notio Entis Tranfcendens. Quid igitur fiet de his unum, verum, bonum f Omnino Enti lubjugandae I'unt, fiant' enim re vera Accidentia. Uriitas eft Denominatio extrinfeca, Rebus adveniens per Intelle6tus operationem, non minus quam dualitas, trinitas, &c. nihil enim eft quod conftituat Petrum unum hominem ante operationem intelledus, quod non eadem ratione, conftituat Petrum et Paulum du^s homines. Formalis etiam ratio Veritatis confiftit in reh- tione inter actum Mentis et objectum. Sic denominatio Bonitatis dicit ef- fentialem refpedum ad appetitim, feu voluniatem aliquam. Imo Deus ipfe 42 ARS SIGNORUM. 0. M. ideo denominatur optimm, quod fit fumme appetibilis : licet enim omnis voluntas creata ceflaret efle, vel appetere Deum, nihilominus maneret femper fumme appetibilis, et actu appetitus ab appetitu peifectissimo, hoc eft fuo ; ideoque fumme bonus. Voces autem Res et aliquid funt omnino Synonymse cum voce Entis. Verum ad has notiones uberius explicandas, et in fumma, ad terminos Metapliyficos, Logicos, et Grammaticos, (quae ut dixi eandem conftituunt Artem) multa verborum caligine obfcuratos et intricatos, difcutiendos, Traftatum fpecialem poftularet : Nam propter defedum accuratae Doc- trinae Logica?, plurimse reperiuntur abfurdse locutiones paflim in fcriptis Philofophorum et Theologorum ; laepius neceffitate impofita, etiam viris dodis, loquendi cum vulgo, ut a vulgo intelligantur. Et quidem hsec Magna Philofophise Reformatio confiftit in Seriei prcedicamenialis legitima ordinatione, quae fons eft omnium definitionum, divisionum, demonstrationum^ aliorumque Logicorum ^rgumentorum, et terminorum : ad quod JVobile Susceptum ut alios provocem, et ut quibufdam objedionibus contra fe- quentem Rerum Seriem in Lexico hujus Artis exhibitam, occurratur, men- tem meam de Prcedicamenti Natura quibufdam generalibus conclufionibus aperiam. Primo, Male reprefentatur a Philofophis pra^dicamenti natura, Arboris fimilitudine ; cum nihil fit quod clarius illuftret banc Rerum et Notionum Seriem, quam Genealogia Generis Humani. Sicut enim fide credimus, omnes homines ab uno primo Parente defcendifle, fie ratione probamus, omnes particulares Notiones ab una prima notione Entis derivari. Hinc eft quod rede vocari foleant Mentis humansc apprehenfiones, feu per- ceptiones, Rerum Conceptus: Res enim ipfae funt quafi Pater, gignens in mentibus noftris fuam Imaginem ; Intellectus vero eft Mater, has ima- gines concipiens ; et Memoria eft uterus, in quo Rerum Imagines fie genitae geftantur. Et quemadmodum videmus numerum hominum, ex fuccefliva et continuata generatione multiplicari ; fie etiam notionum nu- merus ex Mente humana, corpwe non minus foecunda, indies augetur. Et ficut is folus dicendus efiet perfedus Histoiicus, qui omnia Adami gefta, et continuatam Seriem totius ejus pofteritatis, omnefque eorum Adiones recitare poterit ; fie ille folus dicendus efiet perfedus Philo- ARS SIGNORUM. 43 sopkus, qui totum numerum Rerum et Notionum, non minus numerofum quam eft Adami Pofteritas, defcendendo et viciffim afcendendo recitare poterit, omnefque mutuos refpeftus horum inter fe computare. Hinc apparet, quantillum lit quod nos Homines fcimus ; Quam-quantum vero quod nefcimus. Secundo, ft ex una parte, Rerum numerum pene infinitum, multiplicef- que et varios ipfarum refpedus mutuos, ex altera parte imbecillitatem Intelledus humani refpiciamus ; expeftandum non eft, talem seriem Rerum Arte humana conftrui polTe, quae omnibus numeris, et ita ablblute fit per- fe6ta, et quoad numerum, et quoad methodum, ut nihil vel addi, vel demi, vel trayismutari poffit : refpedus enim Rerum ita multipliciter varii funt, ut earum Methodus fecundum varias fuppofitiones et varios refpedus, multipliciter variabilis fit. Nominetur enim quaelibet Pliilofophiae pars, et ad banc tradandam adliibeantur feparatim mille viri dodiffimi ; inve- niretur duos horum in omnibus inter fe non confentire : quod non eft foli humance imbeciUitati imputandum (quod bene advertendum eft) fed partim etiam, Rerum ipfarum naiurcB varietati, et respedui muUiplici. Nihilomi- nus, licet talis perfeclio expeftanda non fit, maximi tamen effet ufus in Philofopliia, habere unam aliquam plenam Serie^n Rerum, fufFragiis multo- rum hominum do6lorum comprobatam, omnes principales et notas notiones NaturcB et ^rtis legitima fubordinatione prsedicamentali per modum Ge- neris et Speciei comple6tentem. Tertio, Duplex eft fuppofitio fecundum quam hsec series Rerum confti- tui poteft, et exinde Rerum Definitiones deduci : Vel primo, inveftigando per Analyfin Logicam, certum numerum primarum et simplicissimarum Notionum, ex quibus omnes aliae complexae componuntur ; et quidem hie Analyticus modus in penitiorem Rerum cognitionem ducit. Novi fenten- tiam efle ingeniofiffimorum hominum, numerum Notionum simplimim per ftri6tam Analyfin Logicam, pauciorem eflTe numero fonorum articulatorum fimplicium per ftridam Analyfin Grammaticam. Vel fecundo, conftitui poteft hsec series reducendo omnes Notiones Naturoe et Artis, tarn Gom- pleoeas quam Simplices, ad lineam re6tam praedicamentalem. Utriufque hujus Notionum texturae magnus eflet ufus in Philofophia. Quarto, In ferie fecundum banc fecundam fuppofitionem ftabilita, max- 44 ARS SIGNORUM. ime naturale eiTet, eandem metliodum obfervare in substantiis, et acciden- tibus ordinandis ; cujus Method! adumbrationem videre licet in Tabulis meis. Quinto, Dh'isio Generum in hac Serie, procul omni dubio, optima et maxime naturalis eflet Dichotomica, quse omnium Diftributionum eft optima, quia prima ; eft enim primus difceffus ab imitate. Nee verum eft illud quod vulgo objieitur contra Dichotomiam, quod magis confundat msmoriam ; modo enim oppofitio quse eft fundamentum hujus diviiionis exhibeatur clara, nihil eft quod magis adjuvet memwiam. Quotiefcunque isritur Memoria confunditur ex Dodrina Dichotomica, revera non tam Me- moria quam Intelkctm confunditur, qui nondum fatis clare percepit divi- ftonis Rationem et Fundamentum. Sexto, Diftributio omnis Praedicamentalis perfefta, eft facienda per dif- ferentias et Species positivas ; fecus enim nulla eft legitima Divifio fafta : nullse enim funt fpecies rerum non existentium, et Differentia? neffativcB ne- queunt fpecies positivas conftituere. Philolbphi et viri do6ti verborum fallacia hac in re valde decipiuntur ; cum enim voces Linguarum vulga- rium non fint Philofophice inftitutse, et propterea cum nobis defint voces ad exprimendas multarum Rerum Differentias Categoricas, hinc eft quod cogamur fingere voces Negativa^, ex vocibus positivis diverfae vel oppofita? fiignificationis, ad Notiones non minus positivas fignificandas, quam funt ifta? quse vocibus positivis notantur : et fie propter defedum vocabulorum, Differentias positive contrarias, vocibus negativis exprimimus. Res ha^c, licet a paucis obfervata, eft tamen apertiffima ; ut patet in his exemplis, cBquale, incequale, par, impar : notio enim iiicequalitatis non minus eft pofi- tiva quam cequalitatis ; dicit enim unam quantitatem elTe alia majorem ; et quid magis pofitivum ? Idem dicendum de par et impar ; quae Anglice, vocibus positivis redduntur, eveti, odd. Septimo, male omnino, et fine ulla ratione, arcent Philofophi Artf^facta a Serie pra^dicamentali : Artefacta enim non minus funt objectum noftrse cognitionis quam Naturalia ; et non minus capacia funt wdinis, et methodic quam ilia. Odavo, Notandum in tali Serie, quamplurimse darentur voces genericcB ; quales funt hse, Accidens, Qualitas, Qicantitas, Relatio, planta, brutum, avis. ARS SIGNORUM. 45 &c. quae communiores Rerum refpedus et convenientias notant. Sup- pofito enim quod numerus specierum infimarum eflet 4000 vel 10000, totidem effet numerus notionum Genericarum: quia fcil. jam luppofuimus omnem Generum divifionem effe dichotomice faftam : et notiones Gene- ricae et communiores, unica voce expreflae, effent valde Empbaticae, et ad docendum aptas. Sic, daretur una notio communis Generica, ad omnes Species differentiis contrariis et pofitivis diftindas : Sicut enim seams eft notio communis ad marem et fceminam, fie cdidum et frigidum, humidum et siccum, durum et moile, &c. unicam notionem communem genericam, in qua convenirent, haberent. Specimen hujus Methodi videre licet apud Petrum Ramum, qui folus (quantum vidi) diftributionem Dichotomicam, fecundum ftriftas leges prcBdicame7itales, in fuis fcriptis Philofophicis ac- curate oblervavit ; licet illi defuerint voces simpUces ad notiones Genericas diftinfte et compendiofe fine periphrafi exprimendas. CAP. IV. COROLLARIA QUiEDAM GRAMMATICALIA EX DICTIS DE PR^DICAMENTO. Ex iis quae jam dixi de prcedicamento in Genere, quod fiindamentum eft, et Materia in qua Grammatica, Corollaria quaedam Grammaticalia de- ducam. Primo, Conftitutio ilia Praedicamenti, quae Notiones primds et simplicis- simas (quarum numerum non fiiperare decem opinio eft quorundam) primo loco difponit ; deinde compofitas ex his paucis fimplicibus, pro ratione varia qua ex his componuntur, et multiplici refpedu quem ad fe invicem dicunt, Fundamentum non eft idoneum Artis Grammaticae ; idque propter du- plicem rationem, unam a Rebus ipfis, alteram a Signis petitam. H 46 ARS SIGNORUM. Primo, qui Analyfin accuratam omnium Notionum Natures et Artis, maxime complca'ai-um, in prima fua Elementa, omnefque refpeftus mutuos simplicium in hoc Compofito, curiofe perfequeretur ; toties neceffario ab illo aflumerentur, et reaflumerentur lioec simplicia, ad varios refpeftus Compositi fignificandos, illudque ab omnibus aliis rebus perfede difcrimin- andum ; ut perfefta jam Analyfi, Notio ha^c wia prse oculis poneretur, faepiffime, in tot Partes diftributa a Philolbpho curiofo, quot corpus hu- manum, poll difleftionem, a perito Anatomico. Et quidem non minus difficile elTet, ex tot partibus per banc Analyfm jam feparatim politis, col- ligere unam completam et integram formam hujus Compofiti, ita clare ut ab omnibus aliis Compofitis ex iifdem limplicibus diftinguatur ; quam ex diffefto cadavere in minutiffimas partes, difcernere cujus lit, an Petri, Ja- cobi, vel Thomae, &c. Non nego (ut fupra docui) hujulmodi Analyfes in penitiorem et interiorem rerum cognitionem ducere ; Imo dico banc ei^Q fummam Philofophiae perfedionem, poffe quamlibet propolitam Notionem in fua prima principia refolvere : qui modus philofophandi utiliffimus nimis negligitur. Apparet tamen ex di6lis, banc Analylin parum conducere ad banc Notionem, fub forma unius Compoliti, Itatim unico Mentis a6tu, line longo difcurlu, apprehendendum, Secundo, Si ligna refpiciamus, idem manifellum erit ; hoc principium omnino ineptum ef^e^ ut fecundum illud Nomina Rebus imponantur. Supponamus enim Notionum aliquam, per didam Analylin dillribui in centum, forte mille particulas, ad omnes minutas DifFerentias hujus Rei, quibus ab omnibus aliis dillinguitur, notandas : oporteret, ut ad minimum, lingular particular feu DifFerentise unam literam, ad illas dillinfte lignifican- dum haberent ; his igitur Uteris in unam vocem colledis, Rerum Nomina in earn longitudinem excrefcerent, ut vox una integram paginam impleret. Summe quidem cum illis confentio, qui majore acumine Philofophiae par- tem Analyticam contemplant, quam Philofophorum vulgus ; quanto pau- ciora fuerint Signa Primitiva, ex quibus Rerum Complexarum Nomina, non ex mero Arbitrio, fed Logice et fecundum Rei Naturam componentur, tanto perfe6tior erit Ars : Frullra enim fit per plura, quod aeque, vel magis commode fieri poteft per pauciora. Verum in tanta paucitate Primiti- varum, ex nimia brevitate, nimia obfcuritas oriretur: experientia etiam ARS SIGNORUM. 47 comprobaret, plus Arbitrii neceffario fore in hujufmodi Compolitis quam ipfis limplicibus. Secundo, Nee ilia conftitutio Seriei Praedicamentalis, in qua omnes dif- tindse Notiones Naturae et Artis, tam complexse quam fimplices, per ordi- natam feriem Generum et Specierum in linea Praedicamentali collocarentur, adeoque diftindis Nominibus Primitivis notandae, eflet ftruaurse liujus Linguae principium accommodatum. Ratio eft, quod numerus vocum Pri- mitivarum effet pene infinitus ; Bauliinus numerat 6000 fpecies plantarum ; Brutorum ingens eft numerus ; vocabulorum Artis et Rerum Artefadarum, a nemine adhuc ad methodum Artis redudarum, multo major effet. Imo, ut decent Pliilofophi, continuum quodlibet minimum dividi poffe in infini- tum, fie non minus vere, quodlibet Genus vel fpecies dividi poteft per infinitas differentias : fie numeric colm'eSy soni, passiones animi, &c. Natura autem ipfa in omni homine docet Rerum Naturas fiib communi et uni- verfali refpe6tu confiderare, et ex paucis quibufdam Communibus Rerum rationibus, particulares Rerum naturas defcribere : quamobrem, omnino aequum eft, ut Ars (quae nihil eft aliud nifi Natura Exculta) rationes Rerum maxime communes doceat, ex quibus particularium Rerum Naturae de- fcribi poffunt. Quare Tertio, neutrum horum extremorum fequendum judicavi ; fed viam mediam ineundam (quae in Rebus multis maxime probatur) hoc eft, fe- ledum numerum principaliorum Notionum, ex primis et pr^ecipuis Scientiis effe delegendum, earum fcil. quas refpedus Rerum Communiores dicunt ; et has pro primis fupponere, iifque fignificandis voces Radicales imponere, ex quibus aliarum Rerum complexarum Nomina conficerentur. Quot autem prsecife numero fint hae Notiones, et fecundo, quasnam no- minatim tales fint habendae, et tertio quo ordine inter fe collocandae ; in his quaeftionibus refolvendis, veriflime dici poteft, quot capita tot fenten- tiee. Cenfeo tamen omnes viros vere dodos mecum in hoc confenfuros, nullam harum quaeftionum determinari poffe fine multo Arbitrii. Ingenii vero mei Menfura circa eas haberi poteft ex Tabulis feu Lexico hujus operis : quas non offero ut Seriem Rerum fiimme perfedam, vel quoad Numerum, vel Methodum Notionum inibi contentarum ; fed multum Av- bitrii habere admixtum agnofco : hactenus enim docui, banc Artem Sig- norum ftridas Leges Philofophi^e non pati. 48 ARS SIGNORUM. CAP. V. EXPLICATIO TABULARUM. QuANDOQUiDEM jam ad folos dodos fcribo, quibus pauca verba fufficient, non morabor longam difputationem inftituere de fingularum Notionum natura et Methodo ; fed paucis tantiimmodo feriem banc Rerum adum- brabo, rationem diffenfus mei a vulgari opinione in quibufdam breviter in- uendo, quae obvia funt prsetereundo. Cum Philofophis omnibus fanioribus Confentio, dari unum Summum Genus, et primum et communiffimum conceptum, quem folemus appellare Ens, feu Res. Verum in primis Differentiis Ens dividentibus, fententia niea ab illorum differt : Tam cito fcil. oriuntur opinionum differentiae inter nos homines, quam in ipfis rebus inveniuntur. Decent illi siibstare et acci- dere primo dividere Ens : Mihi vero videtur, Seriem perfede prgedicamen- talem conftitui non pofle, fecundum quam legitimae praedicationes fieri pof- funt, nifi Differentias concipiamus magis latepatentes, quae adaequate divi- dant Ens, fub conceptu et refpe6lu communiffimo : has ego vocavi, ab- stradum effe et concretum effe ; vel simplea^ et cotnpositimi ; vel ftatum rei incompktum et completum ; Ens vero incompletum fecunda divifione, in Svbstantiam et Reddens dividendo : nifi quis mallet uti divifione trichoto- mica, fie ; Ens efl: substantia, accidens, et Compositum ; quae forte in hoc cafu, et quibufdam aliis, non minus eft; perfeda quam dichotomia. Ratio dif- fenfus eft, quod omnis praedicatio Generis, five immediati five mediati de inferiore fpecie, ficut excludit a liio conceptu differentiam Generis oppo- fiti, fie etiam a conceptu fpeciei de qua praedicatur eandem excludit : quare bene arguitur lapis est cwpus, ergo omnem conceptum spiritus ex- cludit : Lapis est inanimatus, ergo omnem conceptum animati excludit : at vero, hoc falfum erit ; Lapis est substantia, ergo omnem conceptum Accidentia excludit; eft; enim conceptus accidentis non minus effentialis lapidi, quam svhstaniice ; faltem fecundum opinionem hodie communiorem ARS SIGNORUM. 49 negantem Formas Subftantiales Materiales. Cum igitur lapis nequeat dici proprie, vel substantia^ vel accidens; confentaneum videtur, ut alia ratio Generica ftabiliatur in ferie prsedicamentali, quae de bis Notionibus proprie praedicari poffit. Eodem redit eorum fententia, qui fubftantiam dividunt in incompletam et completam ; fed minus proprie meo judicio lo- quuntur, fecundum ftridas leges praedicamentales. De divifione notionis Cona^eti (qua voce ego utar in fequentibus pro svhstantid) videtur eodem modo philofophandum quo de Enite ; vel dicho- tomice, lie ; in imperfeditis et perfectius. Imperfedius continet Concreta vulgo Subftantias Corporeas, et Spiritus a corpore feparatos : perfedius, Hominem, id ell, concretum compofitum ex bis incompletis ; propter quam rationem et alias bic non nominandas, videtur mibi revera Hominem effe omnium creaturarum perfediffimum. Vel fecundo, trichotomice lie, in corporeum^ spiriiuah, et compositum. Hie Notandum ulterius de Notione Hominis, quod male collocetur in linea prsedicamentali fub Genere mediate animal, et confequenter fub Genere Subllantiae corporece ; li enim haec lit vera praedicatio, homo est substaritia cmporea ; fequetur a conceptu hominis removendum omnem conceptum spirittcs. Concreta Materialia divide in Mathematica, Pht/sica, et Artefada. Mi- ratus fum femper has notiones Mathematicas, quas ego bic pro Concretis pofui, a pbilofophis baberi accidentia : Quis enim non clare percipit has voces, punctum, linea, superficies, &c. efle Concreta, cum lignificent sidjectum eiformam f Quare haec propolitio li7iea est longitudo, ell vel identica, vel falfa. Notandum de his Notionibus, quod Nomina Rerum corporearum Quan- titaiem \e\figuram eflentialiter dicentium, hinc defumenda effe : lie, scintilla, arena, pulvis, gutta; mamnim, mamn»)f, mamnom mamnim, &c. id ell, pundum ignis, lapidis, &c. Sic linea ignis, ligni, vel cujufvis materiae, ubi longitudo praecipue innuitur : lie folium Chartae, lamina, bradea, ad fuper- ficiem referuntur. In concretis Phi/sicis Methodum receptam fequutus fum. Corpora omnia limplicia fub uno genere comprehendi ; nee judicabam neceffarium addere illam vocem Genericam Elementi, cum fatis exprimi poffit haec Notio neim grjpomp. Partes Coeli pofui folummodo tres ; nee judicabam necef- 50 ARS SIGNORUM. farium pro conftellationibus omnibus (quae Artis vocabula funt) ponere voces Radicales ; notio enim Conftellationis fatis commode exprimitur, asind^ stellarum aggregaium. Nomina vero particularium Conftellationum, imponi debent ex his, per defcriptionem a forma, numero, iituatione, aut alio accidente maxime diftinguente : e. g. asind va?\ pkiades, &c. quod fa- ciendum Aftronomis commendo ; ficut et in aliis Artibus, terminorum Artis Nomina, ab Artium peritis imponenda relinquo. Vix enim expec- tandum eft ab uno aliquo homine, ut fit par huic fufcepto imponendi apta Nomina terminis Artium omnium, quod faciendum eft per defcriptiones ex primitivis defumptas ; idque quantum cum claritate fieri poteft, in una voce, per derivationem, vel compofitionem : ubi vero natura rerum hoc non patitur, per periphrafin plurium vocum. An detur elementum ignis non difputo, fed vulgarem opinionem hac in re fequor ; ut etiam, (intne iftae partes quas ego pofui, ftrifte loquendo fie dicendse, et inter fe diftinftse. Novi fatis fi detur elementum ignis, ibi nee /"umum, nee Jtdigmem, nee cineres effe : Attamen nemo eft qui non videt, has notiones dicere efTentialem refpedum ad ignem hie apud nos. Sic nolo alTerere has partes efTe ftride loquendo diftinftas ; novi enim fumum et fidiginem differre tantum ut eadem res rarefacta et densifada : vel, fi quis non ferat me fie loqui, fumus nihil eft aliud nifi punctida (fie enim magis Philofophice dicuntur quam Atoma) materiae combuftibilis, per intenfum calorem refoluta et diflipata ; fidigo vero, eft colledio horum fparforum pundulorum in locum minorem. Sed rationem reddidi fupe- rius, cur omnes Notiones vere compositas non hie pro talibus habeam ; et fi de methodo et loco prsedicamentali cujufque particularis Notionis curi- ofe difputaremus, difputaremus in seternum ; quare iterum dico hie mul- tum Arbitrii necefTario eft admittendum. Omnibus igitur confideratis, non vereor afTerere, rede et accommodate fatis ad propofitum meum, has notiones pofitas effe ut partes ignis ; quod etiam intelligendum volo in aliis partibus harum Tabularum, ad quarum particularem explicationem, memor polliciti, jam non defcendam ; fed explicationem Concretorum Physicorum his paucis Notandis abfolvam. Primo, In re Herbaria fecutus fum Senertum, in Arhwihm Spigelium, in hrutis Jonftonum. Secundo, Non omnes difFerentias et Convenientias ARS SIGNORUM. 51 concretorum phyficorum qure apiid lios Autores inveniuntur, fed prseci- puas tantum felegi : Quam inconveniens fuiffet hos Autores in omnibus fequi, nemo dodus non videbit, cui fcripta horum Autorum nota funt, et qui naturam fufcepti njei fatis apprehendit. Tertio, Una et eadem res per variam compofitionem poteft multis appellari Nominibus; fie Elephas, Nnkbeisap, vel Nnksofprr^k. Quarto, Qusedam fpecies vix poffunt unica voce fatis fignificanter exprimi, quo cafu addendae funt plures voces ; quod etiam videri licet in omnibus linguis, prsecipue in numerofa plantarum familia. Quinto, Licet aliquando contingat, quafdam Rerum Species in- fimas non poffe fatis fignificanter Nomina habere a notione Generica, et fuperaddita Differentia, una, vel pluribus ex aliis radicibus, fine longa peri- plirafi ; tamen magis efl philofophicum, et meo inflituto congruum (cum hi cafus omnino rari fint, rariflimi vero [quod prsecipue attendendum eft] in Notionibus communioribus et vulgaris ufus) vel longa periphrafi uti, vel etiam differentiam mere fidam fuperaddere Notioni Genericse, quod plus memoriae opitulabitur, quam fi omnes infimse fpecies fierent primitivae, et ordine numerico difponerentur ; nihil enim magis onerat memoriam, quam ordo numericus. Quinto, Si cui forte magis placeret definitiones Specierum NaturcB et Artis conficere ex Genere, et Loco numerico pro differentia pofito, quam per differentiam petitam ex aliis radicalibus, et Generi fuperadditam ; potefl hoc fieri fine minima variatione harum Ta- bularum, ni. addendo literas terminales voci genericse ordinis numerici fignificativas, e. (j. Nrka^ 1. Elephas. Nnkr\ 2. Equus, NyikeY^^"" 3. Afmus, N-^ko 4. Mulus. Sexto, Nil refert, quod qusedam Genera aliquando coincidant in quibuf- dam eorum fpeciebus ; neceffarium enim duxi convenientias Rerum maxim e communes feligere, licet aliquando coinciderent in aliquibus. Concreta Artefafta quod attinet, nemo Philofophus (quod fciam) ante me tentavit reducere ad prsedicamentum ; multo minus ferunt Philofophi 52 ARS SIGNORUM. ea Substantias (hoc eft entia concreta) vocari. Cum Notiones Artis non minus numerofoe fint quam Notiones Naturce, ideo decrevi, non profequi minutiores DifFerentias, fed quafdam Notiones Genericas difponere, ex quibus Nomina Inferiorum Specierum, vel per derivationem, compofition- em, vel periphralin exprimi poflint. Via admodum intrita fuit in ordi- nandis Genericis Notionibus Artefaftorum : Nihil tamen dubito, quin Notiones Genericse quas hie pofui, fatis lint clarae, et obvige, et inter fe diftindae, ut etiam compreheniivse fub fe omnium Notionum Artefafta- rum. In his explicandis non morabor, fed duabus fadis obfervationibus ad alia tranfibo. Sicut in Concretis Phyficis Nomina infimarum Specierum fiunt per compofitionem ex Notionibus Radicalibus ; lie etiam, hoc idem fit in Ar- tefadis cum eadem prorfus fit ratio utrobique. Quare ficut Nomina ekphantis, equi, muli^ asini^ fiunt ex hoc genere Radicali mk, et differentiis ex aliis Radicalibus afcitis, fie nnkbeisap, nrikpot, nnksofpad, n-nkpim; fie eodem modo, poculum, cochlear, matula, &c. fiunt ex Generica noiionefren^ et differentiis fuperadditis ; frenpraf, frenneis,frenirem, &c. Sic, palafium, career, templum, officina, tugurium, cuhiculum ; fankan, fancog, fanskas, vel fansava, ^^fanskaf,fansp'nd,fanstref,fanfrim ; fie, pileus, chirotheca, thora^y cakeus, bracccB, caligce ; freimmeis,freimsm\iS,freimfeis,freimsm^,freimsmm\ frdmsmer, &c. uno verbo. Nulla eft Notio Radicalis in Tabulis Primi- tivorum Concretorum, five Mathem. five Phyfic. five Artef. ex qua, tan- quam Genere, et aliis aliunde afcitis differentiis, non fiant quamplurima? inferiores Species. Et quidem modi hujus imponendi Nomina Rebus, veftigia quaedam inveniuntur in omnibus Linguis ; neceffitate et Natura ipfa hoc didante, ne fiat progreffus in infinitum. Sed Natura hac in Re, hie ^rte magis excolenda eft. Secundo, Tenendum in Rerum Nominibus componendis, non effe necef- farium ut differentia Generi fuperaddita fit tota rei Forma, quam decent philofophi effe unum aliquid fimplex, occultum (ipfi nefciunt quid) latitans invifibiliter (et etiam inintelligibiliter) in Rebus ; ad quam inveniendam nullum acumen penetrare poteft, Verum hoc eft commentum abfurdum ; omnium enim Rerum quarumcunque formce funt inadasquate cognitae ; nam quicquid cognofcimus de Re aliqua eft pars e]\x% formce : dice eft pars ARS SIGNORUM. 53 Formae ; Forma enim nihil eft aliud quam aggregatum omnium acciden- tium alicujus Rei. Sunt etiam formae omnes inadsequate nobis cognitse, nam multa funt accidentia, qualitates, potenti^e, refpeftus, &c. in Rebus (etiam iis quarum Naturae funt nobis maxime notse) quae a nobis non in- telliguntur. Satis igitur eft, fi differentia fuperaddita Generi, lit tale Accidens, quod diftinguat Speciem ab omnibus aliis. Atque lieec di6ta fint de Concretis ; fequuntur accidentia. Tenendum in Genere de Notionibus Accidentalibus, quod methodus harum maxime naturalis fit eadem omnino quae concretorum : ni. Primo, Accidentia Concretorum in genere ; Secundo, Matliemat. Tertio, Phyftc. &c. ut patet ex comparatione Tabularum Concretorum, et Accidentium. Primum igitur obtinent locum Notiones L/ogiccs, feu Metaphi/siccB, quarum litera S eft Charaderiftica : has qui probe intellexerit, et uti poterit, Logici Nomine vere dignus erit. Solent hae Notiones a Philofo- phis Transcendentes vocari: modo intelligant, quod hae Notiones fint Accidentia, quorum fignificatio communis eft spiritibus, et coiyoiibus abfque uUa Metaphora, ego hunc loquendi modum admittam, fecus non. Inter has primum locum do causis Rerum ; ad quem licet plures redux- erim Notiones quam vulgo folent alii, non tamen quam rerum Natura poftulabat. Secundum locum dedi modis CMstendi; quae Notio valde com- munis et frequens eft, fignificat enim statum, feu conditionem rei. Ter- tium dedi Modis agendi; quae Notio diverfiflima eft a priori, quamvis Logici has confundant; nee quidem ullam accuratam diftindionem faciunt inter Accidens, qualitas, et Modus. Sed cum fmgula profequi non vacet, de gradibus comparationis quos pofui fexto loco, pauca notabo. Notiones hse funt maximi et frequentiflimi ufus ; eft enim A6tus Mentis comparativus longe excellentiflimus in Rerum Scientia acquirenda : \ix proferri poteft fententia in qua Argumenta Comparata vel Caufae locum non habeant. Et tamen in nulla parte Logicas magis c^cutiunt Logici, quam in Dodrina Comparatorum. Etiam ipfe Petrus Ramus, me Judice, Logicorum Scriptorum acutiflimus, hie in tenebris verfatus eft ; nam inter Argumenta Comparata explicafTe debuit magnum et parvimi, et mao'imian et minimum, non minus quam majm^a et minora : licet enim hi gradus dif- tindionis caufa, a Grammaticis dicantur positivi et superlativi, non, tamen I 54 ARS SIGNORUM. minus proprie funt Comparativi, quam majora et minora. Deinde, non fiunt hae Comparationes in fola quantitate, lit ille opinatur ; fed hse notse comparationis tranfcendunt et quantitatem et qualitatem, et utrique funt geque applicabiles. Verum cum voces majora et minoi^a, in ufu vulgari appropriatae (int folummodo Rebus quantis, ut veram naturam compara- torum intelligamus, neceife eft abftrahamus a vulgaribus vocibus, ne vocum ambiguitate decipiamur : quare argumenta Comparata explico per voces Adverbiales, quibus fecundum ufum vulgarem, et re6te, utimur indiffer- enter pro comparatis, tam in qiialitate, quam quantitate. Notae compara- tionis principaliores funt hse ; maxjis, ceque, minus ; ex quibus oriuntur, valde, mediocritery parum, et majcime, minime: fie dicimus, magis longum, et magis album ; fsque longa, et ceque alba. Verum cum has Notiones Nominaliter et adjeftive exprimimus, utimur diverfis vocibus, pro com- paratione in quantitate et qualitate ; et dicimus, magnum ignis, intensus calor ; major ignis, et intensior calor. Dico, licet ftrifte loquendo, omnes gradus comparationis pofTunt reduci ad magis, minus, et ceque ; tamen caeteri gradus, cum innuant diverfitatem graduum, et modi comparandi res, ratio poftulat ea in diftinfta Argu- menta Logica Comparata diftingui. E contra vero, male docetur cequalia, incBqualia ; similia, dissimilia ; paria, imparia, effe diftinda Argumenta Lo- gica, cum in gradibus Comparationis, et Adu Comparative, ne minima (it diverfitas, fed in folis fubjedis ; ut patet ex refolutione harum propo- fitionum ; parietes funt similes ; id eft, ceque albi ; hse duse linear funt cequales ; id eft, ceque longaj ; hi numeri funt pares ; id eft, ceque niulti, feu quanti : in quibus apparet idem omnino efle Logicum Argumentum. De Accidentibus Mathematicis, quorum B eft Charafterifticum : Note- tur 1 . Prfepofitiones quae cum verbis motus junguntur, hinc petendae funt ; quae vocula* (ficut omnes alise particulse) admodum funt ambiguae, et in- certae fignificationis in Unguis. Hujufmodi funt, per, prceter, trans, supra, infra, ad, oh, ecc, in, &c. quarum fignificatio hinc determinanda eft. 2. Pofui fex principales dilferentias situ^, fub terminis relativis, quae ad Mundum applicatse, fignificant Oriens, Occidens, Septentrio, duster. Zenith, nadir: ad hominem relatae, vel brutum, vel Artef actum, fignificant ante, post, dextra, sinistra, supra, infra. ARS SIGNORUM. 55 Sub Genere D pofui illas Notiones quae folent a Phyficis, in parte Phyficse general! tradari ; de quibus hie nihil fmgulare notabo, nifi quod numerum harum multum auxerim (propter majorem facilitatem Com- municationis) fupra quem invenerim in Philofophorum fcriptis. Sub G complexus fum Notiones Phylicas magis fpeciales, id eft, qua- litates sensihiles ; quas diftribui fecundum ordinem fenfuum, progrediendo ab imperfedioribus ad perfediora. Deque his notetur. 1. Defiderari in Linguis vernaculis vocem Genericam ad iignificandum objedum tactm ; cum tamen ratio poftulet ut obje6tum Tactm una voce lignificetur, non minus quam colo7\ sonus, odor, sapor. 2. Tanta eft affinitas fenftium qiistus et olfactus, ut vix cenfeam illos dicendos diftindos fenftis : nee minori cum ratione, (meo judicio) fecundum opinionem Scaligeri, appetitus vene- reus diftingui poteft a fenfti ta6tus. 3. Cum duplex fit objeftum generate visus, ego pofiii colorem ut principale objedum, et lucem ut fpeciem fub eo ; non ignoro tamen multos Philofophos aflerere, Colorem efTe potius fpeciem lucis. De Genere P Not. 1. Quod hie non exprefterim potentias fenfitivas externas [hie] quia fatis commode formantur ab organis fenfus, quae Radi- calia funt inter membra corporis. 2. DifFerentiee Genericse in Tabulis pofitge, ftride et proprie loquendo tales non funt ; nee tales (aufim aflerere) poflibile eft in venire inftituto meo applicabiles; quare docendi caufa folum, pafliones ita diftinguuntur, in principales, minus principales, et affines. Sec. 3. Me pleniorem Paffionum enumerationem fecifle, quam inveniri poteft apud quem vis Philofophum qui materiam banc tradavit ; et tamen prae- cipuas tantum enumeravi : numerus enim paflionum in variis hominibus eft infinitus ; nemo eft qui non habeat in fe quafdam pafliones, quae in nullo alio inveniuntur. 4. Omnes virtutes hinc praecipue petendse funt ; cum virtus nihil fit aliud, quam debita moderatio animi motuum, vitium vero, defedus vel exceflus eorundem. Atque hie filum Explicationis rumpam ; multa confulto tacens, partim quod fciam Homines dodos, et hujus operis dignos cenfores, ex paucis quae hadenus dida funt, rationem Methodi in fequentibus fatis appre- henfuros, partim etiam propter alias caufas. 56 ARS SIGNORUM. CAP. VI. DE INSTITUTIONE VERBORUM, SEU SIGNORUM APPLICATIONE AD TABULAS. Qui in praxi hujus Artis verfari velit, diligenter attendat Regulas hoc capite traditas. 1. Ordo literarum, ut capite primo docetur, perfe6te tenendus et prse oculis ponendus eft. 2. Conatus eram omni ftudio, tot Summa Genera Rerum conftituere quot foni fimplices funt, idque method o correfpondenti inter Signum et Signatum; verum multa erant quas huic conatui obftabant. Quantum tamen potui, convenientiam Symbolicam inter Signum et Signatum, etiam in prima lignorum impofttione obfervavi ; ut coniideranti patebit. 3. Summa Genera Rerum Septem primis literis notantur, id eft, voca- Hbus ; quibus ftibjungitur litera v, diftinftionis caufa, et ut voces flexionis (int capaces: v enim prgecedens, femper eft nota di6tionis niimericce; ipfum tamen v nullum numei'um lignificat, fed tantummodo diftinguit voces nume- ricas ab aliis vocibus ; nam ad eft basis, fed vab ftgnificat 1 4. 4. Literse ei et s, in vocibus Genericis, funt tantummodo serviks et Ea;- pktivcB, ad faciendam integram vocem ; nam in fummis Generibus Concre- torum et Accidentium, Litera Chara6teriftica eft unica : (ic, Jkf eft con- cretum Mathematicum ; iVConcretum phyftcum; /S'Accidens Commune: quare his addendge funt Literal in hoc cafu ferviles eis, iic 3feis, Neis, Sets. In Generibus vero Intermediis Accidentium, quorum duae funt literse Charaderifticae, fola S afcifcitur in fine ; ut gos, color, gis, fonus, &c. Sic etiam in Notionibus Genericis partium cmyoris ; ubi Nomina Specierum formantur additione vocalium ante literam Genericam, ei additur ad vo- cem Genericam faciendam ; ut eim, ein, &c. Cum vero fpecies formantur fubfecutione vocalium. Species diftinguentium, tunc Nomen Genericum formatur additione terminationis eis ; ut meis, neis,feis, &c. ARS SIGNORUM. 57 5. Summa Genera Concretorum tribus confonantibus nafalibus notan- tur ; quibus addenda eft terminatio eis, ut voces integrse fiant, ut jam didum. 6. Intermedia Genera Concretorum fepius Polyfyllabica funt, propterea quod adfcifcant literas Charaderifticas Generum inferiorum. Sic cum Concretum Phyficum dividitur in haec tria intermedia Genera, Inanima- tum, Planta, Brutum, tres literse m, n, / funt Charaderifticae Inanimafi, et copulantur cum litera Generica iV, per fervilem diptliongum ei ; fie, Neimneif. Sic h d g funt Charaderifticas Plantce, et fit neibdeig : p t k, Bruti, et fit Neipteik. 7. In Nominibus Specierum infimarum componendis, quae Charaderibus minufculis in Tabulis diftinguuntur, Literse duae pofteriores, quarum prior fignificativa eft Generis intermedii, pofterior vero ipfms Speciei, folae feptem vocales, et novem principaliores Confonantes, locum habent. 8. In Tabulis Concretorum, Litera fecunda (hoc eft vocalis) eft Cha- raderiftica Speciei ; tertia vero, fcil. Confonans, eft Charaderift. Generis intermedii. In Tabulis vero Accidentium, contrario modo fe habet, ut patet comparando Tabulas. 9. Nomina Notionum incompletarum in Tabulis Concretorum, id eft, Partium Rerum, funt etiam voces incompletae et mutilse : id eft, biliter- ales (duplices enim literaeyr,^, sm, s?i, &c. habendae funt pro fimplicibus, quae loco fimplicium literarum fupponuntur, propter penuriam literarum fimplicium) quae quantum literarum diftributio finebat, habent praecipuam Charaderifticam Literam fui Integri feu Totius, cujus funt partes : Sic partes Figurce habent b, quae eft Charad. Figurae ; idem videtur in parti- bus Cceli, Ignisy &c. ad quarum fpecies diftinguendas s r I funt Charader- ifticae, quae nullo alio cafu funt Charaderifticse fpecierum. Sic Nomina partium Animalis (quod omnium corporum Naturalium eft perfediflimum, ideoque plurimas habet partes) componuntur ex m, % f, quae Charader- ifticse funt Animalis, feptem vocalibus diftinguentibus fpecies, nunc voca- libus prascedentibus, nunc fubfequentibus. Verum tamen Notandum, quod Literarum diftributio non finebat, abfque confufione cum aliis vocibus, omnes partes fie notare, per Charaderifticon Nominis fui Integri feu To- tius, ut patet ex partibus Domus et Navis. 5S ARS SIGNORUM. 10. Liters r et /funt Serviles in Tabulis Accidentium : r eft lignum oppofitse Notionis, / mediae inter duas extremas. Eundem habent ufum in Nominibus Partium^ in Tabulis Concretonim ; Verum in Nominibus Concretorum integrorum feu Completorum, liae Literae poft f ponuntur, propter defedum Literarum limplicium, et copiam difFerentiarum Rerum ; ut etiam aliquando s additur in initio, propter eandem caufam, tam in Tabulis Concretorum, quam Accidentium. 11. Regula oppolitionis et Medii locum habet in folis Accidentibus, et Notionibus incompletis inter Concreta ; De quibus tenendum, Ratio- nem Oppolitionis non femper GiX^e manifeftam, fed ad modum oppolito- rum quaedam difponuntur, quae ftri6te loquendo talia non funt : partim ad fublevandam Memoriam ; fed praecipue, ut facilius comprehendi poffint fub Generibus, et vocibus aptis inligniri, fecundum Analogiam et Regulas Generales hujus Artis. 1 2. Litera / poteft, ubicunque Euphonia poftulat, addi fini vocis deli- nentis in confonantem ; cujus ufus lie erit mere Euphonicus, nili quod neceflario adfumenda lit in plurali numero, quia eadem confonans nequit duplicari line vocali fequenti. Sic etiam, i fervilis praecedit confonantem finalem, voci Radicali advenientem per flexionem Grammaticam, cum natura vocis non poftulat aliam vocalem lignificativam praecedere. 1 3. Nullam reddo rationem Inftitutionis Nominum Animas, Angeli, quse concreta funt Spiritualia, nili limplex Arbitrium ; funt tamen eorum Nomina fatis diftinda ab omnibus aliis vocibus. Deum 0. M. intra Prae- dicamenti limites non conclude, fed ejus Nomen eft vel lie efferendum, sasvia^ Caufa Prima ; vel Avav^ Ens Entium. 1 4. /S' eft Litera fervilis in vocibus numericis, quae intervenit et diftin- guit inter literas numeri lignificativas, et literas Grammaticales Flexiones fignificantes. 1 5. Cum quaelibet vox, ut ingreditur orationem, lit fub aliqua Gramma- ticali Flexione, hinc vox pure Radicalis eft aliquid abftraftum ab omni refpeftu Grammaticali : verum brevitatis caufa, appropriavi vocem ex folis Radicalibus Literis conftantem Notionibus Particularum lignificandis ; quas omnes a Radicalibus Notionibus TabularUm derivari, Logicae eft Myfterium in hac Arte Revelatum. ARS SIGNORUM 59 1 6. Cum voces mutilge, (id eft, Nomina Partium) incipientes a vocali, ingrediuntur Compofitionem, ad modum differentiag (non Generis) adfcif- cunt i fervilem, diftin6tionis caufa, ne fiat confufio cum aliis vocibus. 17. Accentum quod attinet in hac Lingua, tenendum breviter. In vo- cibus diflyllabis penultima eft longa ; in plurifyllabis eft brevis, nifi longa fuerit pofitione duarum confonantium. 18. Ad diftinde et Euphonice eiferendum voces feu fonos hujus Lingua?, hoc unicum requiritur : Accurate diftinguere fonos feptem vocalium, et Regulam de Accentu jam traditam bene attendere. 19. Vox primitiva pure Radicalis ex Tabulis Concretorum, fignificat ipfam notionem Concretam, Nominaliter, in cafu redo ; eadem ex Tabu- lis Accidentium, fignificat Notionem Particulce, ut di6tum. 20. In Compofitione vox Generica preecedere debet, differentialis fequi ; ut, Nnkbeisam elephas, non Beisammk, Smfgab adamas, non Gahsmf. 21. Ultimo, confulo ne diu h^ereatur in Prseceptis et Regulis contem- plandis, fed ftatim ad Praxin progTediatur ; ex modica enim praxi, facilia admodum invenientur, quee primo intuitu et non exercitato difficilia videntur. Et quod eft bene obfervandum, licet hie figna non ex mero Arbitrio, fed cum ratione Inftituantur ; adeoque Memorise femel imprelTa, Intelledum erudiant de Rerum naturis ; tamen in Committendo voces Radicales Memorise (quod eft primum faciendum in ordine ad praxin) parum, vel nihil attendenda eft Remm et Signorum Methodus in Tabu- lis: via enim datur multo compendiofior imprimendi Signa Memoriae, de qua pauca dicentur capite fequenti. 60 ARS SIGNORUM. CAP. VII. DE SUBSIDIIS MNEMONICIS. Rerum et Conceptuum noftrorum Signa dupliciter in Memoria reponimus et confervamus. Primo frequenti repetitione inculcando ; ita ut Signum auditumvelvifum,fTequenti ufu, videaturRes ipfa, licet ab eadiverfifRmum: Tantum fcil. valet ufus. Et quidem fola hsec aduum repetitorum fre- quentia efficere poteft ut memoria extempore fuo officio fungatur, fine Intelleftus du6tu, five res memorandse Methodice difponantur, live omni Methodo iint folutae. Nee facilius acquiritur facilitas et habitus memo- randi certum aliquem numerum Rerum maxime methodice difpofitarum (hoc eft, ita ut earum quselibet feparatim ftatim defignari poffit, line mentis difcurfu) quam par numerus Rerum non cohaerentium reponi poteft in Memoria ; Et Ratio hujus eft, quod Memoria (ft liceat Animi Facultates diftinguere) lit Facultas omnino Paffiva et receptiva Idearum, ab aliis animi Potentiis libi concreditarum, et ad eam nihil fpe6tat, (cum omnino caeca lit, et omnis cognitionis et judicii expers) quo pa6to res ad ipfam de- ferantur, Arte, an Sorte, quocunque eafu, vel Conlilio; ilia agit confer- vando et retinendo fecundum fuas vires naturales. Et quidem ft proprie loqui velimus, in Memoria Artificiali, five id fiat in Rerum Serie Legi- tima et naturali, five per fidam mentis connexionem, Memoria hie nihil praeftat Artificiale fiipra fiias vires naturales. Sed totum hoc eft Ra- tionis opus, educentis ex Memoria Signa vel Res, in ipfa olim receptas et depofitas. 2. Ratio humana, quse Scientise Compendio quantum poteft naturaliter ftudet. Memoriae imbecilitati opitulatur, operando connexionem Rei Ig- notas cum Re Nota, vel Rei Memorandse cum re Memorata : in hoc enim folo, tota Ars Memorise fita eft. Et quidem hie eft naturalis effedus Rationis in homine ; videmus enim faepiflime in puero vel fervo, fi ipfis mandetur Nomen aliquod incognitum recordari, ftatim Ratio, quafi natu- ARS SIGNORUM. gl rali inftindu, confugit ad compofitionem hujus Rei Incognita cum alia Cognita affinis foni. Hac autem compofitio dupliciter fit; vel 1. Ubi eft neceffaria, et naturalis Renim ipfarum connexio ; vel 2. Fit per Iblam Men- tis Fiaionem. Cum compofitio fit fecundum Rerum ipfarum Naturas, vel Generalem aliquam Regulam, eo firmior eft et permanentior : Exempla harum funt omnes Compofitiones et Derivationes in Lingua Rationali, et etiam quae in aliis Linguis regulariter fiunt. Sic, cum quis didicit primam conjugationem, ex verbo amo ; poftea fi audiat banc vocem vigi- Mmnt, ejus fignificationem ftatim intelliget (modo quid fignificet vigilo prius intelligat) quamvis banc vocem, vigiMunt, nunquam antea audiverit. Ratio eft, quia intelligit per partes, 1. quid fignificet vigilo: 2. Quid terminatio bunt; quare etiam partes regulariter compofitas, intelligit. Exempla com- pofitionis Fiftse funt voces Radicales fequentis Lexici, quse longe facilius in Memoria reponuntur, per fi6tam banc connexionem, quam per difcurfum Logicum ; etiamfi fupponeretur Metbodum banc Notionum ita Logicam et Naturalem effe, ut Ratio non minus facile poflet eas percurrere, quam Literas Alpbabeticas recitare. Hoc fcio videbitur multis valde abfurdum ; eft tamen experientia certiffimum, et Ratio etiam evidens eft bsec ; Dif- curfus Logicus, eft via multo longior ad inveniendum Signum, quam con- nexio bsec fi6la ; dum enim ego ex difcurfu logico, quseftturus fum vocem bujus Linguffi pro animositate, neceffe eft Ratio formet omnes bos dif- tindos Adus ; eft Accidens ; eft accidens phyficum, fenfitivum, cujus P eft Cbaraderift. 2. Eft fub genere intermedio quinto, et eft fpecies sep- tima fub boc Genere. Quare licet Metbodus eilet ita perfpicua, ut ratio fine errore poflet omnia bffic percurrere, tamen base eflet maxima tortura Mentis, tam longum difcurfum formare pro ftngulis vocibus. At vero, in fida compofitione, unicus tantum eft adus Mentis ad inveniendum fig- num : fie, v, g, pop CBstimatio ; ego finxi connexionem inter papam et cesti- mationem : Cum igitur audio banc vocem cBsiifnatio, ftatim, etiam fine ullo difcurfu, recordor pope : Vel fi audivero pope, viciflim ftatim recorder eesti- mationis. Et quidem, ficut parvo labore poflunt voces Radicales memoriae mandari per banc Artem, fie parvo admodum exercitio, pofiunt bomines fatis expedite communicare, ex vocibus bac ratione in Memoria repofitis. Fateor, ad recordandum voces extempore, fine ullo Rationis et judicii ex- 62 ARS SIGNORUM. ercitio, habitum requirit ; ad quern gignendum in Memoria, nee Ratio vera, nee fi6la multum conducunt, led fola repetitio frequens,ut fupra. Qui io-itur recordatur per banc fidam connexionem (quae duarum Reruni tantummodo eft) fine ullo refpedu ad res alias, comparari poteft ei qui quserens duos amicos, reperit eos folos in Domo aliqua Ampla : Qui vero recordatur per difcurlum Logicum, pertranliendo longam Seriem et Cate- nam Notionum, illi, qui queerit duos amicos in Templo inter mille alios homines. Vel poflTunt hi comparari duobus hominibus a Palatio Regio Londini, \icum Lambeth ex adverfo petituris ; alter Fluvium Tamefin cymba reda trajicit, alter circuitum facit per pontem. Quare confulo ei qui voces Radical es Memorise committere velit, ut prorfus negligat Me- tliodum Pliilofophicam Tabularum, et hac fola Fi6ta Connexione, utpote multo compendiofiore utatur. Hie ponam exemplum 60 Vocum Radi- calium, ex quibus judicari poteft de casteris. France, table. Flanrfer*, aratrum. Vomum^ admiratio. Adam, succus. ^dmiindus, cortex, ^gly, arista. Pot, animositas. Fanr Agger, rjp nomind. Aggredi, sem kum. Agrestis, sir an. Agilitas, sprnt, dam, sod. Agmen, shum ind. Agricola, nomspripel. Agnatic, steb. Agnomen, ton svba. Agnus, nekpimva. Ah, prob. Ahenum, fren nefgoba. Alabrum, sabframdef. Alacer, pob prim. Alapa, digu snf smvs. Albugo, shunu gofa snt mvs snf snur. AlchjTnia, temu snf gakreu snf nef . Alea, mib spafa. Alias, danslom. Alibi, dadslom. Alienare, g^g shnd strof Alimentum sangum. Aliquando, shundan. Aliter, slomses. Alius, slam. Allevare, drnmresj pobresv. Allicere, turn spak. Allidere, shomdenesj. Allucinari, tren. AUudere son spam pvp. Almus, gum pok. Alere, gum. Alphabetum, tommu snna. Altare, fran skaga. Alter, slomvn. Altercari, spap. Alternare, snt shnd. Altitudo, bafu. Alvearium, dadu snf snap nengnm. Alveus, ab snf ris. Alvus, fos. Amanuensis, irin. Ambages, trommi spake sliba. Ambiguitas, slib tose shumir. Ambitio, trvbpebstnf. Ambitus, eb beg. Ambo, vn, lot tnn lei. Ambulare, pnb. Ambulacrum, dadpnb. Amentia, grugrin. Amita, stebpragva snf pagel. Amnis, ris. Amoenitas, ped pob. A mpliitlieatrum, /raw spafa, fa da, feda Amplecti, beg smu. Amplus, sum beisam ban. Amussis, sabbnf Anathema, truf. Anatome, temdoniov. Anfractusj bmf. Angere, pred prob. Angina, grugnir. Anhelare, grugsheppam. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 85 Animadvertere, puf, pem. Animal, ov sripe. Animus, eiv tarn. Annulus, frvmsmus mah. Annus, danial danvu. Ansa, sunu dun dvf. Annales, sefdan. Anteferre, svbpop befdad. Anticipatio, sub bef sodesv samesu Antipathia, shorn. Antipodes shomsmur. Antiquitas, drab. Antistes, stnf. Anus, dobu snffvs. Anxietas, pred, prob pnm. Apex, rab Apoplexia, grugsofpies grugdod. Apostata, sofslem. Apostema, grugbrap. Apostolus, kad. Apparere, mrfosv, pem pef. Appellare, ton. Appendix, shunu trflio droso. Applieare, dit dad. Approbare, tad tvf. Aptitudo, sit SOS. Arbiter, kr,mel tvdo. Arcanum, dit sofpem. Arcere, krum shaf drng. Arduus, shep baf shrib. Arena, nnfmamind. Argentum, nef vnsa. Argilla, nafgap. Argumentum, sas^ sog. Arguere, tap trub kib. Arista, vg. Arithmetica, temtng. Armentum, — irid neikflanind. Ar&re, Jlan. Armilla, fr^msmn. Aroma, neibdeig gema. Arra, shunu snf st^du. Arrestare, kod. Arridere, spam ped. Arrogantia, trubsodpop prig. Articulus, smeis drod. Arx, fan kusa. Ascendere, dam pnb pnd bns ben. Aspicere, mns. Aspirare, pam, dnf spnm. Assiduitas, pip slem. Assuescere, set. Astrologia, temias. Asylum, dad snb. Atomus, mam. Atrium, rebak. Atrox, pit pin. Avaritia, trvd pvk. Author, sas sam sem. Audacia, put pot. Audire, mrjr. Auferre, bemdep. Augere, s-jn. Aurichalcum, nefgod. Aurora, semu srf dangom. Aurum, nefsimap. Austeritas, grnn prid pin. Aut, trrf. Automatus, sabdan dame lul. Autumnus, danrag. Avunculus, stebel vasn srif patel. Bacca, ragnog. Balbus, grugshaftin. Balneum, dadnimsif. Baptismus, nimsif skapttim . N 86 LEXICON Barba, amnir. Barbarus, pit softos. Barritus, panu snf nnksvf. Basium, neis. Batillum, frennrim. Beatitude, skan saku sima. Benignitas, pokpon. Biblia, sefsasva. Bills, »jni. Bilanx, sabtr,gdnm. Bitumen, nafgap. Blaesitas, grugshaftin. Blanditiae, pvp. Blasphemia, truf sasva. Botrus, ragsnug. Braccae, smnrfreim. Bractea, mem. Braxare, g\idesM jlnm. Bucca, nos. Bulbus, mnh. Bulla, m-^h sr\f nim. Cacare, em dragres^ fos. Cadaver, ou shnpa. Caecitas, sofmris. Caedere, shnpres^. Caelare, temdom, trin. Caelebs, trim stef. Caeremonia, stam. Caesius gop. Caespes, shunu fnf mem snf nom. Caespitare, shaf smvs grugpris. Calamitas, skran prob. Calamus, fam Ind. Calcar, sabdik. Calceus, freimsmxir. Calculus, grugnrif sabtngshum. Caliga, freimsmer. Callere, gab prim. Calva, mas. Calvities, grugsqfiam. Calumnia, kibu shiba. Campus, lor. Canistrum, /ron. Canities, am gof. Capti vitas, kug. Canon, keb tok. Capere, dvf. Capistrum, sabmeisdrod. Capsa, fern, fron frvn. Carbo, san sofnnm, nafn-^m. Career, dadkog. Cardo, ib. Caries, gr\jp. Carina, ab sriffnn. Carminare, drop sud. Carpentum,^m. Carnefex, kasshriprel. Carpere, drid drat. Cartilage, raf. Carus, strid svm. Casa, fan strrib. Caseus, Jtorn. Castellum, fankus. Castigare, kof. Castrare, sofsner. Castus, tubpap. Casus, sak sris iron. Catalogus, fefton. Catena, sabdrod fr^m. Catulus, nik potva nik primva, &c. Caudex, Ivd. Cautus, tef prim pud. Caulis, hd. Caverna, ol. Celebritas, stnf strin tip. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 87 Celeritas, dnn. Cella,/ow. Celare, dit. Centrum, mam hrepa. Cera, nennnm. Certare, spap kub spng. Certitude, sih. Cervisia,^»!m nvpa. Cessare, sofsod sofslem. Chaos, ov sofshana shud. Character, torn dip. Cliirotheca, freimsm\js. Chronica, fefdan. Cicatrix, dipu snf domu fnf ef. Cicur, prin. Cingere, beg drod. Circa, beg. Circumferentia, eb. Circa, lolirib. Cisterna, frennim. Civitas, fanind. Cithara, frib. Clam, sofpem. Clamare, svmpan. Claritas, gon gid. Classis, fnnind sud. Claudus, sofsmvi' grugpnb. Clavus, Tit Jim. Clavis, sabdog. Clementia, prit. Clivus, blnn. Cloaca, fam, snf avvi shiffa. Clunis, f\is. Cochleare, f rennets. Caena, steim, paf shemdangom. Cogitare, tat. Cogere, shek sed. Collegium, stes fanstes. Colare, freim/meir. Colon, top. Colus, sabfram. Comis, prinstan. Comma, top. Commercium, stes stos. Communicare, pemrefu tosresu. Compendium, bram. Compositio, shr^n. Computatio, tngesi> shum tnn. Conatus, dnf. Concedere, tad. Conscio, trodu sti^na, skasa. Conculcare, brensmvresu. Conclusio, tr^m shnm, tnt. Condire, gi^sreso. Conditio, sris trim. Condonare, stup. Conducere, strob sig. Condylus, smeis. Consideratio, tat. Consumere, gr^p sofshan. Contra, shorn. Convenire, dim sprap sos. Conversatio, stes sod. Convivium,^im shek slubpafu. Copia, s^m. Coquere, gud. Corium, nf. Corona, frMmmeis. Corrigere, sensis sensham. Corrugare, dek. Corrigia, shund^if sr\f freimsmxir., sabdig. Corrumpere, gr^p, sofsham. Coruscare, gom. Cras, danve dangom shvb. Creare, sowesu san sofavar. Crepusculum, glom. 88 LEXICON Creta, nafgof. Cribrura, sabsinrer dobo. Crimen, kvs. Cruditas, grvd. Crumena, fromsum. Crus, smer. Cnista, memgab. Crux, sabshripren bmna ship prob. Cubare, pnk brrim. Cubile, frun. Cubiculum, fanfrun. Cudere, dib dig. Culina, fanfleimgud. Culmen, rab. Culpa, prem kvs. Culter, sabdom. Cumulus ind wp. Cunae, frunuvva. Cuneus, sabdrob. Cupio, peb tvg. Currere, sumprib. Cuspis, shundikbep. Custodire, shad. Debilis, sofsef. Decretum, kom. Decere, sit seb shanu sima sin. Decipere, spak. Decorum, shanu sima sin sudu sima sit. Decus, stnf sin prog. Dedecus, sofstr,s shin pog. Dedicare, sprif tr\jn. Dedignari, prop tages^ sofsat. Defetisci, spvit. Deficere, shvd shng. Degener, sosshn pagel. Deinde, sh^bsiid shubdan. Dejicere, dedresv dene8\i bns bren. Deinceps, sh^bdan. Delere, sofshan. Demere, dos tmn. Democratia, kanstmfu. Demonstrare, pemresv sibresv. Denique, shubapai. Deorsum, bns bren. Depsere, gvmesvjlam sofgvdo. Descendere, pnb dam bns bren. Designare, tonesv shug trvn. Desinere, sofslem. Desistere, sofslem dram. Desperatio, sofpof. Detrimentum, strng shvd. Dextera, smv beba. Diabolus, oiv shima. Diadema, /rum meis snf kanel. Dialogus, snttinu slubtinu. Diaeta, sespaf danpaf dantut. Diameter, ib. Diarium, fef danve. Dico, tin tim. Dies danve dangom. DifFerre, slom. Dignitas, stnf stnd sat. Diluculum, semgom glom. Diluvium, nimdit. Dimidium, shunu vrisa. Dirigere, damresu habai sud. Disputare, tap shorn tap. Diu, svmdan. Divortium, strvsu snfstefu. Dolare, gratresv. Dolus, spak shib. Domare, kut prinresv. Dos, fum strib stefa. Dubitare, slib plem. Durare, danes^ stem. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM 89 Ebrietas, trvbpraf. Ebur, nas srifnriksvf. Ecce, puf pom. Ecclesia, steskam. Ecstasis, grug shng snp. Esurire, pebpaf. Egere, sh^g. Egregius, sin simap. Electrum, ad snf sneiggigema. Eleemosyna, stifprit. Elementum, shan vasa neim grupomp. EUychnium, Am mnni bepa snsfrmi. Eloquentia, temtin simtin. Embryo, snus. Emungere, sif. Epliippia, frim nrikpota. Episcopus, kaf. Epistola, trin. Equitare, nnkpotdeposv. Eremus, nom gruna sofstido. Erigere, bnmresu. ^sca, Jleim gumer. Evangellum, tibsnb. Eucharistia, skappik skappaf. Evenire, shed. Examinare, tnb tid. Exsanguis, sofien. Exanimare, shripresv sofeivresv. Excellentia, sis sim. Excommunicare, sofstes. Excussio, dos beddenesv. Excudere, trin dip dibtrin. Exercere, set sprip. Exercitus, kragind. Exlialatio, nein. Exilis, shum grad. Existere, av. Exlex, kvb shng keb. Exorcismus, kvk. Exoriri, semgufhen. Explicatio, tif. Expugnatio, kut. Exter, bed stred. Extinguere, shemesj nnm sofsham shnp- resv. Exilium, kob. Exuere, sqffreim sofdit. Faber temel. Fabula tigshib. Facetiae pid. Facere sam. Facultas sef tern. Faex grup. Falx, sabdom braha. Fames, grugshvgjleim. Farrago, gum shud. Farina, mamind difo snf nub. Fas, kef keb. Fascia, srrimdrod Fascinare, kvk. Fastidire, preb prop. Fateri, tvf kig. Fatigare, sprjt. Fatum, sak komor frvnor snf sasva. Favere, pon. Favus, nengnmitid Faux, neir. Fax, frm- Febris, gritggam. Ferax, gun. Ferre, dep. Ferrum, nefgab, Festinare, dr\n. Festus, skas. Fibula, sabdrod. 90 LEXICON Fictio, pug trim shib. Fidelis, sib sid sofpug. Fides, t^jp. Fiducia, t\jp sib. Figere, dvmresu dramresu. Figulus, samel s^ffrenni noma. Filius, pagol. Fimbria, bep. Firmus, dram^ sofdam. Fistula, fam fab. Flabellum, sabdamnem. Flagellum, sabdig. Fligere, dig pronreso ship. Flare, nemesv pam nnn. Fluere, gak. Fluctus, gaku snf nim. Flumen, ris. Fodere, bagresv nom. Fossa, dadbog ol. Faedus, stos. Faenus, stngfum. Faenum, nab. Follis, sabdamnem. Forceps, fum. Formosas, sin. Fornix, rep. Forte, sak shed. Fortis, sef dnb. Forum, dadstof. Foveo, shad gum pum. Fomes, shan snf nnm,. Fraenum, sabd^nmeis. Frater, steb vasa. Fremere, sv?ngis. Freudere, nasdim. Frequens, srjt shum Frigere, g\)d. Frivolus, sofshem sofsig. Frustra sofshem. Fuga, pnp. Fulcire, dnd. Fulgere, gom sengom. Fulmen, gisies. Funda, sabden. Fundamentum, ab. Fundere, gakresu bedgakresu. Fundum, ab. Fungi, kas. Funus, stam nomdit shnpal^li. Furca, sabdikm Furfur, shunsir snf mamind. Furor, svmpod. Fustis, sabdig neiga. Fusus, sabframdef. Galerus, freimmeis. Garrire, pan neip tin svmtin. Gangraena, gruggrup. Gelu, gramgvb. Gemitus, grugbredgis. Genealogia, fsfpag fefsteb. Genus, tob sug pad. Generosltas, pot stnf. Generalis, sug sun. Gens, sten. Germinare, guf. Germanus, sib. Gigas, uvim. Genius, tam. Glaber, sojiam. Glacies, nimgvb. Glans, rag snng mnb. Glaucus, gop. Gleba, shujinom. Globus, mnh. Glomus, mnbfram. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 91 Gloria, stef prog sin. Glubere, dos nf. Gluma, ig. Gluten, shangap rnp- Glutio, paf. Grammatica, temtos. Grando, nenmam gvba. Granum, gupar suma rug. Gratia, pon skam pik. Gratis, stifai. Gratulari, stat. Gremium, shunu hem smnrri. Grex, shum, ind. Grundia, ek. Gubernare, kan sud. Gula, snas. Gutta, mam srif nim. Habena, shundiif snf sahdunmeis. Habitudo, son snf. Habitus, set. Hamus, rnbshnp sabrrfi sabbrab. Harmonia, sosgis. Harpago, sabdrid sabdvs. Haurire, deb. Hebdomas, danvo danvai. Hebetude, pirn, tamu sum a. Herus, kam. Hilaritas, pob pid. Historia, tig. Hodie, loldanve. Horizon, mab bepe mrjsu. Horreum, fanneib. Hortus, dadneid. Hospitium, steg. Humerus, fes. Humilis, prot hren. Hyems, dangram. Hypocaustum, fangam. Hypocrita, pug. Jactare, prog. Jaculum,^^. Janua, ak. Idea, sag. Idioma, tin. Idolum, sasva skiba. Jecus, snes. Jejunus, pebpaf drag grun. Igiiominia, trud pog. Ignorantia, sofpem. Ignoscere, krof kon stup. lUidere, dam den shom. Imago, slvn sag. Imber, nan. Imminere, lud tim ben meis dedemp I mo, tim sib. Impensa, strip. Importunitas, dan shit ship svd. Imputare, kib. Incendere, semesu nnm. Incestus, kvfsteb. Incitare, spad tub. Ineommodum, sofseg stmg shr,b. Incus, sabbrendig. Indoles, tarn. Indulgere, pon s^mpum. Induere, freimesv dit. Indusium, bredfreim. Industria, pip pum spnp. Infans, uvva. Ingenuus, pis sima, tvb sid. Inguen, shu snvr. Initium, sem. Innocentia, sofkvs keb. Inopinans, sofpun. 93 LEXICON Insigne, tos stnf toskus. Instituo, tih tT\»n sud. Integer, sis sun sofdon. Intercapedo, bem. Iiitercedere, pr,besv bem lol brem lei sntkif. Interdum, shundanni. Interea, trimshaf luldan leldan. Interest, seg sig stvg. Intermitto, sofslem. Interstitium, bem. Intricare, dop shep. Inventarium, feffrein. Invicera, snt. Iris, mabgosies. Irritare, spad sofsham. Iter, prid. Jubere, tup. Jubar, mnm snf gomu. Jugulum, meir. Jugum, sabdrosmeir. Jumentum, neik spnp. Jungere, dros. Jurgium, spap. Juvenis, uvve. Labare, ded. Labarinthus, shep. Lacertus, smn. Lacus, lir. Laedere, predes^ k^m. Latari, pob. Laevigare, gratres^. Lagena, fren nnfa. Lambere, nareso. Lamentari, spab spram. Lamina, mem. Lannpas, frr,n. Lana, nm s^^if nekpim. hancea, Jip. Languere, gritgdrnb. Laniare, dom dof kasneikshnprel. Laqueus, sabspat. Largitas, pok. Lascivia, trobpap. Latere, dii sofpem. Laterna, femfr^n gona. Latrina, faniem. Latro, kvn. Latrare, panu svt nikprim. Lavare, 7iimsifesv. Legere, tin tif. Legumen, nvb. Lentigo, grugslomgos. Lentus, drnn gap. Lepidus, pid pobre. Lepra, gruggojinf. Lethargia, grugprab. Librare, trig dnm. Lienteria, gruggratsna/r. Lignum, neig sneig. Limare, gratresv. Limen, abiak. Limes, bep tos. Limus, nomshif. Linire, din. Lingere, naresv. Linteum, fremsnvd. Lippus, grugpredmns. Liquor, gan. Littus, rib snf is. Livor, pvb pron. Locare, dad stob. Lodix, freimfrun. Lorum, frnmfrm. Lues, grugsumshnp. Lumen, gom. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 93 Luscus, grughmfmm- Lutum, nomshif. Luxuria, trvbped. Macer, grad shumief. Machina, sabkus. Macula, slomgos. Madere, gan. Magnus, svm. Majestas, sxjmu kana. Mala, no nn. Malleus, sabdig sabdib. Malle, tvd sun. Mandibula, nrj. Mane, semdangom. Manere, dram stem danesv. Manica, freimsmes. Manifestus, pemo. Manipulus, ind drot. Mautile, freimfran freimsmvssif. Mantica, from. Manubrium, shundvf. Margo, bep. Marsupium, from. Massa, mim. Mater, pragel. Matrimonium, stefu. Maxilla, nris. Mederi, gugresj. Meio, remesu. Mel, nengnm. Membrum, shun snf ov. Membrana, nf grada ed grada. Menda, sir trenshvd. Mendacium, tinshih. Mendicare, tunjleimtun. Mens, eiv tam^ tat. Mentio, tin. Mensis, danm daniar. Mereri, sat. Meretrix, kub. Meridies, brepdangom. Meta, tos bep. Methodus, sud. Metere, dom droteso raggi. Metrum, trog. Messis, dandrotrag danrag. Mica, shunif. Migrare, shvdesu stidu bemdam. Mimus, pvn. Minuere, shumresu. Mittere, pndres^ stin. Modus, ev sns ses. Modestia, tubpog. Molare, dif Momentum, danva. Monachus, kaf stes. Monere, penresv tub. Moneta, fum. Monstrum, gup shrik. Monumentum, femshnp av penre. Mora, dan shaf. Morbus, grug. Mordere, nasesv. Mortarium, frendif. Mucere, grup. Mucro, bep. Mulcere, din prinresu. Mulgere, baddib drid en. Mulier, uv prog. Mulcta, fumkof. Mundus, avind. Mungere, dib sif Munire, upesu rupesu feipesu. Munus, stif Murmur, grid. O 94 LEXICON Murus, ip rvp vp. Musculus, ef. Musica, temgis. Mussare, tinesv gridai gibai. Mutilus, sir shvge shunu. Mutus, softin. Mutuare, stop. N^vus shin shif. Nanus, uvif. Nares, doggu fnf m\i. Nasci, prat. Natura, sasn-n shan sek. Na\igare, fnndeposu. Nausea, griig pehdag snal. Nebula, nengrafes. Nebulo, uv shima shiba, kusel. Nee, frin trim. Necesse, sed. Necare, shi^presv. Nectere, drop dop. Nefas, sofkef sofkeb. Negligere, prip. Negotium, sar sod san. Nemus, sneigdad. Nere, framresu. Nequam, shim kvs. Neuter, sojiav fnf vn. Nictare, dam, mri. Nidus, dadneipprat. Niger, grof. Nimis, sijd. Ningere, nen gofa guba. Nitere, gom briggom. Nocere, shig kum. Nodus, drod dop. Norma, sabbab tok. Noscere, pern. Notio, tab pefn^ shan. Notorius, svmpemo. Notare, tos puf. Nothus, pagol sofstefa. Novacula, sabdom. Nox, dangrom. Nubere, stef. Nudus, sofdit soffreim. Nugae, tinu pifa sofshama. Nullus, sojiav. Numero, tng shumit fus. Nuncius, stinel tigel. Nutare, dames^ meis. Nux, ragsnig. Obducere, dit. Objicere, shomtin shomden. Obruo, dit dedresu dib. Obscoenitas, pog tinu papa. Obscuritas, grom shep. Obses, stvf Obsoleo, sofset. Obstetrix, safpratel. Obstinatus, trubpib. Occidens, shunu breba snf nam, Occupare, dvf stib. Ocrea, freimsmer. CEconomia, steis. Officium, steis. Offieium, kas. OfRcina, fanspnp. Oleum, ad. Olere, ges. 011a, fren. Omen, tos. Omittere, trim sameso sodesv. Omnis, sun. Onerare, dnm. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 95 Opera, shp. Opus, sprip sar. Opportunitas, dansit. Oraculum, tridu snfsasva keb. Orbis, mab. Orificium, dog. Oriens, shun beba sf^f nam. Oscitare, grug dogmeis. Ostendere, samesv mrisesu pemesv. Ostentum, av shnka. Pascisci, stos. Pagina, nb. Palatium, fan snf kanel. Pallium, freimbed. Pallere, gog. Palma, shunu baga snf smu. Par, slvnshum. Parabola, shntrod sagtrod. Parare, sad sitre. Parvus, sh^m. Pascere, gum . Passus, prjbu suma. Pater, pagel. Patrimonium, slnbu slima. Patina, frenfleim. Patria, pratnom. Paucitas, shvmshum. Pavire, gratres^ rukres\j. Pacare, sprad krus. Peccare, kus tren. Pecten, sabdrop. Pecus, neik. Pedere, fusgis. Pendere, bnm dnd. Pensum, spripu fngo. Penetrare, dob blnn. Pera, from. Perire, sofiav sofshan. Perficere, sisresv shem. Peripheria, eb. Peritia, tern ten prim. Pernio, grugsmor. Perperus, shim tren. Pessulus, up. Petra, nnfind. Petulans, prig put. Philosopliia, tern., temtef. Phlegma, ran. Pius skas skam. Piger, prip. Pila, mnb spaf. Pileus, freimmeis. Pingo, trinfnd. Pinguis, gad efgnn. Pinaculum, mub. Pistillum, sabdib dif. Placeo, spag ped. Planus, grat. Platea, dadpnb. Plaustrum, slin. Plecto, dop. Pleuritis, grugfal. Pluvia, nen. Poculum, frrenpraf Podagra, grugsmor. Paena, kof. Politia, keis. PoUex, smus svma vasa. PoUiceor, stvm. Pompa, feid stam. Pono, dam dad bns. Populus, uvind. Porrigo, drek. Porta, ak. Portentum, tos shnk. 96 LEXICON Postis, ep. Praeceps, hlr,m ded. Praecipuus, s-of. Praeda, kup. Praedico, tin str,n svbiin. Praedium, stib. Praejudiciiun, subtaff. Praelum, sabdib. Prasmium, strit. Praeposterus, shvbsvb. Praesepe, dadpaf. Praestigiae, shib spak. Praestolor, piin dap Praetendere, pug Praevaricari, tren shib. Prandium, pafu brepdangom. Pratum, lornab. Primiti\Tis, snm. Princeps, kan svf. Privilegium, kebstrnn. Procella, dam shek. Proclivis, blnm ded. Procus, pon tun stef. Procul, skvinbem. Prodigium, pom. Prophanus, skram skar. Proficio, sig sim. Profiteer, tim kig pern. Prodigus, trvbpok. Progenies, pagolli. Prohibeo, tup shomtup. Promineo, brap blnm. Promiscuus, shud. Promptus, sit. Promontorium, rub snf nom. Prosper, sak sima. Proverbium, tinu sugcB. Prudentia, tef teg. Pruna, ov nrflna. Prurio, grugdin. Puer, uvvn. Pulvis, mamind. Pupilla mnb sufmns. Purgo, sif. Pus grup. Pustula, grugmribinf. Puto, tag tat. Putris, gr\jp. Quadra, vorvb. Quatio, damresv. Quateiius, son. Qualis, ev s^s geis. Quisquiliae, shif. Racemus, rag snug. Radius, mnm. Rado, dam din. Ranceo, grvp. Rapio, dos dvf. Kastrum, Jli^n. Ratio, tap sas. Raucus, gruggig. Reus, kvs. Reeens, dab. Reciprocus, si^t. Recorder, pen. Recreo, sprnt. Reddo, senspnb. Reformo, senshan sendab. Rego, sud pnt kan. Regnum, kan. Relinquo, suf. Remedium, saf gug. Repagulum, up. Reparo, senshan sendab. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM 97 Repentinus, pun dnn. Repo, prif. Respublica, sten str,bu sfrjua. Restis, frjm. Resurrectio, sengvp. Rete, fremspat. Rheda,^iw. Rigo, gan. Ripa 7ib snf ris. Ringo, drit nassi. Ritus, sfam. Rivus, rir. Robur, sef drjb. Rodo, din nas. Rogo, tun tid. Ros, nen grafa. Rostrum, meis snf neip. Rota, mab. Rotundus, mnb. Rubeo, god. Rubigo, grup. Ructo, grugnemsnal. Rudis, softem gat stran. Rudo, panu srif nrikpim. Ruga, dek. Rumor, tip. Rumpo, don. Ruo, ded. Sabbatum, danve vaisa. Sacer, skam. Sacrilegium, kunskas. Sacerdos, skagel. Sal, nafgrnf. Salarium, frennafgrnf. Saltern, sh\jf. Sanctus, skam. Sapo, sansif. Sarcio, senshan saf sis. Satur, dag. Saucius, grug. Saxum, n-fifind. Scaber, gat. Scabies, gruggr^pinf. Scamnum, frin dadpnk. Scandalum, sprag. Scando, dred. Scateo, dot gak rir. Scelus, kvs. Sceptum, sabdrnd snf kanel. Scheda, mem snffirf. Schisma, dos kvd. Schola, fantrib. Scintilla, mamnnm. Scopae, sabsif. Scopulus, nnfind. Scoria, grvpu snf nef. Scortor, kvf Sculpo, trin dam. Scutum, fvp. Sebum, ref Secretus, fofpem dit stmn. Seculum, danial vali dansnp. Securis, sabdom. Securus, snb prip. Sedeo, pnk. Sedo, sprad. Sedulus, pum pip. Semita, dadpnb. Senex, uv draba uvvu. Sentina, sabdebnim. Sentio, peis. Sententia, trod tag. Sepelio, brennom dit. Sepio, ip beg. Septentrio, bref. 98 LEXICON Sera, sabdrog up. Serica, san snffrem sneipa. Sermo, tin trod. Sero, g^. Serra, sabdom gata. Setae, am. Severus, prid pin. Sibilo, grid panu srif nuk. Significo, tos. Sileo, softin. Similis, shn. Simulacrum, shn fnd. Simus, mvsbrab. Sindon, fremsn-od. Singularis, sum shnk. Singultio, grugdeksnal. Sino, slaf. Sinus, rnb snf is. Siphon, fam. Sisto, dram dus. Sitio, pebpraf. Situs, bris grvp shif. Solea, ab snf smur. Sollennitas, strjn. Sollicitus, pum pip. Solidus, gad graf. Solor, trug. Solum, ab sum. Solus, sum ster. Somnio, prab pef. Sorbeo, paf. Sordeo, shif. Soror, stebprag vasa. Sore, sak. Spatium, bem. Species, tlob shan. Specimen, trib jjreg. Spectrum, mrisor profre. Specus, ol. Sperno, prop. Spina, af snf far. Spinter, dop drod. Spisso, gaf gad. Splendeo, gom. Spondeo, st^m. Sponsus, stef. Spongia, sabsif. Spuma, memmnbind. Spuo, ra7i. Spurius, shib pagol sofstef. Stagnum, lir. Stamen, fram. Statuo, tag trvn. Statura, bam tng. Sterquilinium, shifind emind. Sterno, dit dedresv. Sterauo, grug sifmus. Sterto, grugprabpan. Stillo, mam ded. Stimulo, dik. Stipo, krum prnp. Stipula, Ind rnd. Stiria, mvm mob snf nimgub. Sto, bnm. Stabilio, dramresy, keb. Stomachus, snal. Strabo, grug brnfmns. Stragulum, freimfrun. Stramen, Ind snf nob nvb. Strangulo, shafpam sofpam. Strepo, gis gig. Strideo, gis gig. Stringo, dib. Strophialum, fi'emsmus freimsifmvs. Struma, grugmnb meir. Struo, feinesy drot. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 99 Studeo, tat. Stupa, sn\)d sir. Stupeo, pom grtigsofpeis. Stiiprum, kof. Stylus, ex sahtrin sestrin. Suadeo, tut tub. Suavis, gem sip. Subitus, sofpun dnn. Submerge, brednimesv hrennim. Subside, ded dam hns ah. Subula, sabdoh. Succedo, shvb. Sudus, gon sqfies. SuJfRcientia, shd. SufFulcio, dnd. Sugo, deb drid. Sulcus, dripu snfjlan. Surama, sun. Suo, dros. Superbus, trubpop. Superfluus, svd. Supero, svn kut. Sura, smer. Surdus, grugsofmnr. Sursum, dred bvs ben. Suscito, pabresv. Suspiro, grugsheppam. Susurro, trin grid. Sylva, dadsneig sneigind. Symbolum, tos. Syncerus, sib sofpug. Tabeo, gruggr^pslns. Tabula, fef. Taceo, softin. Taedeo, spnt. Talis, lelsns lolsns. Talus, af snf smvr brapa. Tango, brem gas. Tela, frem. Temerarius, soften. Temno, prop. Temo, shundun snf stin. Templum, fansava. Tempestas, dan damn snf nem. Tendo, drek damesv bns. Tenor, sud shan sot. Tento, preg tnb. Tepidus, glam. Terebro, dob. Tergo, sifdin. Tergum, nf far. Termino, hep shem. Tessera, tos mnb spafa. Testa, /r7!7i noma mem g aba. Texo, dop fremres^ Theatrum, dadfad. Thesaurus, fum stnb. Thorax, freimfeis. Tibialia, freimsmer. Tingo, gos. Tinnio, gis nef Titillo, dinped. Titubo, pnb brnf shaf pr^b. Titulus, mam ked. Toga, freim ham. Tolero, prod slaf. Tondeo, dom. Tono, gis. Torculare, sabdih. Tormentum, pred. Torno, temdomes\j mnbai. Torpeo, spnt drnn. Torqueo, mahdamesvr. Torques, frvm hegmei. Torrens, ris. 100 LEXICON Torreo, nrim gvd. Torvus, pit prid. Trabs, ap. Tranquillus, dram. Tremo, pro/dam. Tribunal, frinknm. Tributum, fumkan. Tripudio, tempng. Tristis, proh. Triumpho, fed. Trochus, sahspaf moha . Trudo, did. Tuber, grugbrap. Tubus, fam. Tueor, krum. Tumeo, hrap drek. Tumultus, grim dimu sr\f uvvi shuga Tundo, dig did. Tunica, freimseis. Turba, ind shum. Turbo, er mabdan. Tunis, fankus fanfub. Tyrannus, kanel pita. Vaco, drag sofspnp. Vadum, dradpraf snf ris. Vagus, sofstid trenpnd Vah, prob. Valetudo, gug. Vannio, nemsif. Vanesco, sofslem mrisosv. Vapor, nein. Vapulo, dig kof. Varius, slom. Vasto, drag sofstid. Ubertas, gun. Udus, gan. Vectis, sabdeg. Vegetus, gugspmt. Vehemens, svm, pin. Vellus, ditu ama srf nekpim. Vendico, krib. Venenum, shnpre. Veneror, skaf Venia, stvp. Venor, pnt spnm. Ventus, er. Ver danguf Verbero, dig. Verbum, trom. Verecundus, tvbpog. Verro, sif din. Verruca, grugbrapinf Vertebrae drosu snf smeis. Vertex, rab. Vertigo, grugdebrin. Veru, ibjleimgvd. Vesper, shemu srf dangom Vestigium, dipu snf smur. Vexillum, toskus. Vexo, ship. Via, dadpr,b. Vibex, dipu snf domu snf nf Vibratio, dam den. Victima, skag. Vicus, dabpnb brana. Vicinus, sted shvm bem. Video, mnsosM peisgosesv. Vigeo, gud sprnt. Vilis, prop stnd shuma. Villa, fanind sh\)ma. Villus, am. Vincio, drod. Vinum, adsnug. Violo, shin kxim. Virga, mnmdig. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM 101 Virgo, pragal sofpragel. Viscus, vd gapa. Vito, pub snb shaf. Vitulus, nokflanva. Ulciscor, p^d. Ulcus, grughrapgrvp. Ullus, av. Ultimus, sh^h. Umbra, gron. Uncus, sabrnbdif. Ungo, din dit dot. Unctuosus, Universalis, stig. Unusquisque, sunsum sunshun. Vola, shun baga s^if smvs. Volvo, deb. Vomo, dragesu snal. Voveo, stvm. Urbs, fanind. Uma, fren noma. Uro, nrimesv. Uter, lul snf vn av. Utrum, tid. Utor, sab slam sig. Usurpo, stibesM shorn keb kef. Vulgus, uvvi strnfa. Vulnero, dom. Vultus, mar. Uxor, stefprag. Zelotypus, pup. Zona, eb mab. Zythum,^?!m n\jba. Sequitur fpecimen Artis inftituendi Nomina Speciebus Naturae fignifi- candis, comple6tens prsecipuas Notiones fub Genere Concreti Phjsici contentas, quse in S. Sc. occurrunt : Et h^ec Exempla inftar Regulce lint, fecundum quam omnium aliarum hujufmodi Notionum Nomina inftituenda funt. Naf Medium Minerale. Carbo, nafgrofnnm. Sulphur, nafgobnnm. Sal, nafgrnf. Argilla, naf gap. N?!f lapis Vulgaris. Silex, nnfgab nnfnr^m. Pumex, nnfgraf. Tophus, nnfgrap. Magnes, nnfdeb nefgab. Cos, nrifbribre. Alabaster, nrfgofgrat. Marmor, nnfgrat. Gypsum, nrfmp. Coralium, nnfgod. Vitrum, nnfg^bnnm. Crystallum, nnfgvbnrjm gona. Gagates, nnfgen. Gemma Snif. Adamas, snnfgab. 102 LEXICON Sapphirus, snrfgroh. Achates, snnfshnmgos. Jaspis, snnfgrod. Carbunculus, snrfnnm. Amethystus, snrifgrog . Chrysolithus, snnfgob. Smaragdus, snrfsvmgrod. Topazius, snrifgromgom. Chalcedonius, snr,fgof. Metallum Nef. Aurum, nef sis. Argentum, nefgofsis. Stannum, nefgofsil. Plumbum, nefgofsir. Cuprum, nefgod. 2EiS, nefgoh. Ferrum, nefgah. Herba Neib. Gramen, nah. Caepe, nebgnn agm-jba. Allium, nebgnn agbana. Cucumis, nib m^ba. Cucurbita, nib moba. Melo, nib svma. Malva, nrMagban. Triticum, nubsim. Hordeum, nuf)/lr,m. Taba, nobsvfbab. Zizania, nobshvf. Pisum, nobslvf. Sinapi, mibgrnm. Lilium, nadsin. Viola, nridgem. Urtica, S7ijd oda. Linum, snvd ruggrata. Cannabum, sfivd svfa. Cicuta, snrjdgen. Mentlio, snaibges. Hyssopus, snedgem. Cuminum, snridgem. Coriander, sn^d ritgbag. Nardum, snaib aggob. Balsamum, aiiaibgem. Nad, agsvbrag. Aloes, snudgrem. Laurus, neggem. Erica, nag grunnom. Ruta, naggen. Thymum, naggem. Rosa, nng lagsin. Arbor Sneid. Fraxinus, snagsvm bamriig. Tremulus, snag qgdam. Salix, snag nglag. Quercus, snngsjm. Abies, sneg bab. Ficus, sn^g agban. Cedrus, snegbam. Castanea, snig aggat. Pomum, snog. Pyrus, sn'jg ragmob. Morus, S7ivg lading. Bruta Exfaiiguia. Apis, snapgnm. Culex, snnpshvf. Cicada, snnkspan. Pulex, snnkpvg. Pediculus, snnkuv. LATINO-PHILOSOPHICUM. 103 Formica, snrtkpeg. Aranea, snnkfiam. Limax, snakdrnn. Vermis, snak. Avis Neip. Aquila, napsjf. Cignus, nupsvf. Columba, nipprin. Gallus, nippot. Pavo, nipsin. Hirundo, neipdrin. Vespertilio, nnpbvppm. Alauda, nephenprm. Phoenix, neipva. Cuculus, nepsompa7i. Ardea, nvpsvmspis. Corvus, napgrof. Regulus, neipslmf. Strutheocamelus, neipsvf. Quadrupes Neik. Equus, nekpot. Elephas, mksvf. Asinus, nnkpim. Mulus, nnksofpad. Camelus, nekbrapfar. Unicornis, nekivmva. Bos, nekflan. Cervus, nekdrjn suna. Dama, nekdnn shuna. Canis, nikprim. Lepus, nokdnn suna. Cuniculus, nokdnn shvna. Leo, nikpot. Pardus, nikshvmgos. Sus, nekshif. Felis, nokditiem. Crocodilus, naksofnar. Cliama^leon, nakshridgos. Sequitur Praxis, PRAXIS. PRIMUM CAPUT GENESEOS. 1. Dan femu, Sava lamefa Nam Un Nom. 2. T'Jn nom avefa fof-lliana tin draga, t'Jn gromu avefa ben mem I'jf ba- fu: t>!n v\ ihf Sava damela ben mem f»if nimmi. 3. T»in Sava tinefa, gomu avefo : t^Jn gomu avefa. 4. Tin Sava milefa gomu fima : inn Sava dofefa gomu dos gromu. 5. Tin Sava tonefa gomu Dan-gomu, tin tonefa gromu Dan-gromu : tin fliem-gomu tin fem-gomu avefa dan-ve vafa. 6. Tin Sava tinefa, dad-dreku avefo bred brepu fif nimmi : tin dofefo nimmi dos nimmi. 7. Tin Sava famefa dad-dreku, tin dofefa nimmi bi:en dad-dreku dos nimmi ben dad-dreku : tin lel-fis avefa. 8. Tin Sava tonefa dad-dreku. Nam : tin Ihem-gomu tin fem-gomu avefa dan-ve \nik. 9. Tin Sava tinefa, nimmi bren nam dekofo bred dadu fuma, t?3n gra- nar mifofo : Un lel-fis avefa. 10. Tin Sava tonefa granar Nom, tin tonefa deku fif nimmi, Iffi; Un Sava mifefa lolar fima. 1 1 . Tin Sava tinefa, nom g^pefo nab, neibeid gune rug, tin rag-fneig gune rag fos fugu l^^la, rug fef lul tim bred l^^l ben nom : tin lel-fis avefa. 12. Tin nom gunefa nab, neibeid gune rug fos fugu l-'la : tin fneig gune rag, rug fif lul tim bred M, fos fugu li^la : tin Sava mifefe lolar fima. 13. Tin fhem-gomu tin fem-gomu avefa dan-ve vefa. 1 4. Tin Sava tinefa, gommu avefo bred dad-dreku fif Nam fliam dofefu dan-gomu dos dan-gromu : tin lelli avefo fas dannu, tin dan-vefli, tin dan- vuffi. PRAXIS. 105 15. Tm lelli avefo fas gommu bred dad-dreku ftf nam, fliam gomelL ben nom : t»!n lel-f>js avefa. 16. T'Jn Sava famefa vi gommu fuma, gomu funa fham fudefi. dan-go- mu, tTO gomu fhi^na lliam fudell dan-gromu : tin famefa affi. 1 7. Tm Sava dadefa lelli bred dad-dreku fjjf nam fham gomelu ben nom. 1 8. T))n fliam fudefi^ dan-gomu, tin dan-gromu, fJn dofefy gomu dos gro- mu : tin Sava mifefa lolar flma. 1 9. Tin fhem-gomu, tin fem-gomu avefa dan-ve vofa. 20. Tin Sava tinefa, nimmi ftm-gunefo neit, tin neip pjjme bred dad- dreku fif nam ben nom. 21. Tin Sava famefa nt^tti f^ma, tin neipteik fun-fuma pine, lul nimmi fum-guuefa fos fugu Mia tin neip fun-fuma fpifo fos fugu Ma : tin Sava mifefa lolar fima. 22. T^n Sava tufefa lelli tine, gunefo tin fuf-funofo, tjjn dagefo nimmi fif iffi tin neippi fuf-ft'nofo ben nom. 23. Tin fhem-gomu tin fem-gomu avefa dan-ve vt'fa. 24. Tin Sava tinefa, nom gunefo fneikki tin neikki fos fugu l-^lla: t7;n lelfis avefa. 25. Tin Sava famefa neikki tin fneikki fos fugu Mia : tin Sava mifefa lolar fima. 26. Tin Sava tinefa, lalli famefo Uv fos fagu lalla fos fl^nu lalla : t7;n lelli kamefo neitti fif is, tin neippi fif nem, tin neikki, tin nom fuma, tin fneik funfuma pife dnd nom. 27. Tin Sava famefa uv fos fagu li'la, lelil famefa lelil fos fagu fif Sava, lelil famefa lelilli pagel tin pragel. 28. Tin Sava tufefa lelilli tin tinefa fhod lelilli, gunefo, tjju fuf-funoib, tin dagefo nom tin kamefo lela, tin kamefo neitti fif is, tin neippi fif nem tin neikki tin fneikki fr;f nom. 29. Tin Sava tinefa, puf, lal fpibela fliod lilli neibeid fuma gune rug, lul tim ben mem fif nom fuma tin fneig fuma lul gunefi rag tin rug, lilli fjjgefu lella fit fleim. 30. T»)n lal fpibefa, fliod neikki fuma, tin neippi fuma tin fneikki fuma, neibeid groda fuma fit fleim : tin lel-fis avefa. 31. Tin Sava mifesa avvi funa lul famef>) : tin puf, avefa f^m-fima : tin fhem-gomu tin fem-gomu avefa dan-ve vufa. 106 PRAXIS. PsALMUS Primus. Tudti vasa. 1. Uv tim tufo lul trim p^jbefi fos tutu fif fimalli tin trim b^jmeli bred dadp>ibu kufelli, tin trim pikefi bred dadpiku lif uvvi ftrabemp. 2. Sor, lelil pobefi (hop kebu fif kamel, t^jn tatefi fliop kebu lela dan- gom tin dangrom. 3. Sas, lelil avefu fli^n Iheig gube fi^mbem riffi fif nimmi lul ragrefu dan danu lima : ag lula trim grudefu ; tin lullulir lelil fodefu, limefu. 4. Kufelli, trim lolfis, for tim flun ig, lul nin didefi. 5. Lelfas fimalli trim bimefi.i bred dadkimu, tin kufelli bred ftefu fif fimalli. 6. Sas, kamel pemefi foddu lif fimalli, t»!n foddu fif fliimalli fofavrofu. T'udu vnsa. 1. LuLSAS llenni podefi, tin uvvi takefi foffliamar. 2. Kanelli fif nom flubk^defi, t»jn kamelli llubftefefi fliom Safva, tin fhom pagol lila. 3. Lalli donefo fabdroddu lella, tin denefo fimmi lella bem lalli. 4. Lelil lul ftidefi bred Nammi fpamefu, Safva fi;rabefu lelli. 5. Leldan lelil tinefu fliod lellil podai, tin fliipefu lelli fas podu Lla fuma. 6. Lai dadefu kanel lala ben Zionoi or lala fi^ama. 7. Lai pemrefu tr^nor, Safva tinefa fliod lal, 111 tim pagol lala : lal pa- gefa 111 lol-dangom. 8. Tunefo lal, tin lal fpibefu fliod lil, fl;enni fi;imu l»;la, tin beppu U^ nom fi:ibu lila. 9. Lil difefu lellil fab fabdonu nefgaba, tin donefu lellil flmnnu, flun fren noma. 10. Lelfas, lilli Kanelli tefefo loldan : lilli Kimelli fif Nom tibofo. 11. Kramefo Safva profai, tin pobefo damprofai. 12. Neifefo Pagol, fliam lelil trim podefu, tin lillil fliiprofu bred dad- pibu : luldan podu lila mmefu, funilli lul ti^pefi lil tim flcana. PRAXIS. 107 Tudu vesa. 1 . L>!L Safva, lulfis flretelli lala fliumrofi ? lulfts (liumalli pr/jkefi fhom lal? 2. Sumalli tinefi fliod Eiv lala, Safva trim fafefu lelil. 3. Trimfliaf, 14 Safva tim fi^p lala, progu lala, t^jn benrel Ui meis lala. 4. Panu lala panefa Safva, fJn lelil m^refa lal, bred or kla fkama. 5. Lal p'ikefa inn prabefa, im fenprJikefa : fas, Safva fliadefa lal. 6. Lal trim profefu iivvi valili lul begefu lal. 7. Kamel, pr'ikefo : Safva lala fafefo lal : fas, hi digefa afnos ftf ftretel- 11 lala funa ; hi donefa naffi ftf lliimalli. 8. Sibu tim ftf Safva Un \n\ tufefi uvvi l»jla. Tuda vosu. 1. Ljjl Safva lul fkamreli lal, mjjrefo lal luldan lal panelii : hi f^breta lal, luldan lal ihipoft : pritefo lal, t»jn mjjrefo fkadu lala. 2. L'jlli pagolli f»!f uvvi, lulflemdan hlli £h>3defu progu lala f'Jt pogu, po- ne foffigu, t»jn fp»!me fliibbu. 3. Sas, IjjIU pemefo, Safva tt^defa fmial fliam Mil : Kamel m»jrefu luldan lal panefu lelil. 4. Pfgefo, t'Jn trim kufefo : t»3befo fleffi hlla ben frunni hlla, tin prodefo. 5. Spiifefo fkaggu f>jf kefu, tin ti'pefo Kamel. 6. Shumalli tinefi lulil fafefu lalli m^ifef" fimar ava ? Kamel, fafefo go- mu fjjf mar Ijjla gomrefi^ lalli. 7. L»]l fafefa IjjI f»3gefu pobu funa f»)f fles, lulai lelilli f>!gefa, luldan ni^b t»!n fl>?mfnug lella f^mrofe. 8. Lal pikefu, t'Jn prabefu krufai : fas, hi Kamel fuma fafefi lal ftidefy f>)bai. T'udu v^sa. 1. Kamel, m>jrefo trommi lala, tedefo tatu lala. 2. Kanel lala, tin Safva lala, fum mirefo fumpanu lala : fas lal (kadefu hi. 108 PRAXIS. 3. Kamel, M m»;refu panu lala dan femdangom; lalfkadefu M dan fem- dangom, Un pudefu. 4. Lulfas, l»3l trim Safva, lul ponefi fliimu : fin fliimal trim llidefu dap hi 5. Trefalli trim f'lddapefu bef m>jffi l»;la : 1»)1 pronefi kufelli funa. 6. Lil fhjjprefu lelilli lul tinefi Ihibu : Kamel ft^mpronefu uv >)npebemp tin fpakemp. 7. Slom, lal pr^defu bred fan l»jla fas prittu l»]la fuma t»jn lal profe Irjl, fkafefu bjj ; Fanfkaf l»!la fkafa. 8. Kamel, pirefo lal, fos libu kla fas ftretelli lala; babrefo dadp»]bu l»jla bef mar lala. 9. Sas fibii ava trim bred neis lilla, fliunnu breda l»!lla tim ftiimu funai ; neir l''lla tim fanfluipu dogo, nar lilla pi'pefi. 10. Safva, flirjprefo lelilli; lelilli dedefo flam tiittu lulla: beddenefo le- lilli fas kulfu lella fuma, fas lelli kubefa fliom ItjI. 11. Shom, funalli lul t^pefi h\ pobefo : lelli fundan f^mpanefo fas pobu : fas 111 krumeli lelli : Un lelli lul ponefi tonu l^jla, pobefo fas ItjI. 1 2. Sas, h\ Kamel, tufefu fimal ; ponu I'ila krumefu lelil flun f^p. Fabula tEsopi 1 7- Shop JVei'teikp^ggi Un Kanel Mia. Stenu fif neiteikp>)ggi, luldan fofkrama, tunefa Jupiteroi famefu Kanel fliam lelli. Jupiteroi ftrabefa tunu fjjf neiteikpjjggi. Trimftiaf, lelli tunefa fenai t^jn fenai flemdan lelil tumofe ; lelil dedrefa ap : ap d»ima damrefa nimmi t»!n famefa grimu fuma. Neiteikp'iggi profro foftinefa ; lelli fl^afefi Kanel Ula, Lelli pr^defi flii^mbem lelil fliumai fn ftn^mai : Shemai, lelli fofprofe dredp»)gefi dnd lelil tin dedpigefi fenai. Kanel pripa ftrabofi tin propofi : Lelli fentunefi Jupiteroi famefu Kanel pota fliam lulli. Jupiteroi famefi ni^pbammeir Kanel li^lla. Lelil pibe drid nom gana fumpotai pafefi neiteikpiggi funa lul fpinefi. Leldan neiteikpiggi fpabefa foffliamai fhop pitu fif Kanel l^^lla. Jupiteroi trim mircfi lelli ; fas, lelli fpabefi flem danve lola. Sas, luldan ni>pbammeir draipefi dan fliemdangomu, lelli pjjdefi bed olli Mia tin panefi : lelli fpanefi fliod fofmireL Sas, lolar tim tufu fif Jupiteroi, lelli lul tunefi fliom Kanel prina figefu Kanel pina. PRAXIS. 109 Fab. 41. Shop nvkp^n tnn nvkpi^im. Ni^KPi^N tuneli nukprim fp>)befu fhod lei fhunu f»jf om Lla ftiam ditefi> W\ : fas, lelar d^jmefe lei, lul figefu inn ftjjfefi; lul. Nukpun tridefa, LI trim f»)gefa av ava fuda, t'jn LI tudefu fub om lula dinefu nom, fhub fuffi fjjf nuk- prim ditofu. QuANTUMVis nil dubitem quin poflet ingeniofus quilibet debita diligentia adhibita, ex Do6lrina hie tradita (cum praxi) in interiora hujus Artis pe- netrare, fi quid tamen alieubi videatur obfeurius didum, paratus ero (fi a viris dodis ad hoc rogatus) fenfum meum plenius et dilucidius explicare; pr^ecipue in Partieularum materia, Stru6tura Orationis, et quarundam For- mularum loquendi Analyli Logica. Nee vereor hie aflferere, si Juvenes Praxi hujus Artis diligenter intenderent, majorem inde frudum percipe- rent quam ex ledione multorum voluminum metaphyficorum ; illinc enim inanem et inutilem (fine praxi) Artis Theoriam, maximo cum lludio et la- bore, hinc vero ufum maximo cum compendio acquirent. Prseterea, fi illis cordi fuerit quibus efl officio Rei Literariee profpicere, fumptus operi pares facere, Charader Philofophicus, Typis aptatus, qui rerum ipfarum immediate lit fignificativus, parabitur. Singuli autem horum Charaderum fingularum notionum radicalium in tabulis pofitarum fignificativi, pauci- oribus, ut plurimum, lineis et pennae dudibus formabuntur, quam fingulee vulgares noflras literse alphabeticse ; et eadem erit Ars variandi lios Cha- raderes, qua Soni hie exhibiti diverfificantur. Quantum autem fcribendi Compendium hinc exiftet, judicium penes dodos efto. FINIS. Q DIDASCALOCOPHUS Or The Deaf and Dumb mans Tutor, To which is added A Difcourfe of the Nature and number of Double Confonants : Both which Tradn being the firft (for what the Author knows) that have been publiftied upon either of the Subjeds. By GEO. DALGABNO. Printed at the Theater in Oxford, Anno Bom. 1680. Imprimatur, TIMO. HAL TON Vice-Cancel Oxon. THE INTRODUCTION, WITH A KEY TO THE FOLLOWING DISCOURSE. ABOUT twenty years agoe, I publiflied, Latiali but imdi Minerva, a Synopfis of a Pliilofopliical Grammar and Lexicon, thereby ftiewing a way to remedy the difficulties and abfurdities which all languages are clogged with ever lince the Confufion, or rather fince the Fall, by cutting off all redundancy, reftifying all anomaly, taking away all ambiguity and fiequivocation, contrading the primitives to a few number, and even thofe not to be of a meer arbitrary, but a rational inftitution, enlarging the bounds of derivation and compoiition, for the caufe both of copia and em- phasis. In a word, defigning not only to remedie the confulion of lan- guages, by giving a much more eafie medium of communication than any yet known, but alfo to cure even Philofophy itfelf of the difeafe of Soph- ifms and Logomachies ; as alio to provide her with more wieldy and man- nageable inftruments of operation, for defining, dividing, demonftrating,&c. What entertainment this defign may meet with in following ages, I am not felicitous to know ; but that it has met with fo little in this prefent age, I could give feveral good reafons, which at prel'ent I forbear, intending, if God blefs me with life, health, and leifure, to do this in a more proper place. To me 'tis enough to have the tellimony of feme of the learned men of this prefent age," who are beft able to judge in things of this na- ture, that I have there difcovered a fecret of art, which by the learned * Dr. Seth Ward, now Lord Bishop of Sarum, Dr. John Wilkins^ late Lord Bishop of Chester, Dr. John Wallis, Dr. William Dillingham. 114 INTRODUCTION. men of former ages, has been reckoned among the desiderata of learning : to which I may add, that this difcovery is made from more rational, eafy, and pradicable principles, than ever they imagined to be poffible. To this treatife I gave the title of ^rs Signorum, which, in compliance with the diale6t of the prefent fcene, I may properly enough change to Sematology. This foon after became a fruitful mother of twoliller-germans, Didascalocophus, and a Discourse of doid)le Consonants; which having lyen as twins in the womb for many years, at laft two fevere fits of licknefs did midwive them into the world, the latter here in order being fenior to the other by the fpace of full feven years. That the argument I have in hand is worthy to be treated of, will rea- dily be confeffed by all; but how worthily I have handled it muft be judged by a few, to whole candor, paffing by all apologies, I freely fubmit. The former treatife of Sematology had the univerfality of all mankind for its objeft, but had nothing to recommend it but conveniency ; this of Didas- calocophus is reftrained, at leaft in its moil proper ends and principal ef- fects, to a fmall number of mankind, but comes recommended with the flrongeft arguments of charity and neceflity. But at prefent I will difmifs the Mother, and betake myfelf to put the Daughter in a proper drefs for the following fcene of aftion. The foul of man in this ftate of union depending in its operations upon the bodily organs, when thefe are vitiated, it muft needs follow that the foul itfelf is fo far affeded, as at leaft to be hindred in her external func- tions. Being, therefore, to treat of a way to cure a weaknefs that follows humane nature, equally aifeding both, I will leave it to the fkilful phyfi- cian to difcourfe of the caufes and cure of the difeafe, as it concerns the body, and will apply myfelf to confider of the means to cure the better part of the man, which is the proper work of a grammarian. And becaufe the fubje6t I have in hand is te^/ '^ij^riviiag, and more parti- cularly one branch of it, which, for what 1 know, has been hitherto, ea; professo, treated of by no author, I will firft mention all the feveral wayes of interpretation, whereby the foul either doth or may exert her powers ; in doing of which I will be obliged to take the liberty of coyning some new words of art, which hereafter I will explain. INTRODUCTION. 115 It is true that all the fenfes are intelligencers to the foul, lefs or more, for though they have their diftin6l limits, and proper objects affigned them by nature, yet Ihe is able to ufe their fervice, even in the moft abftraded notions, and arbitrary inftitution; but, with this difference, that nature feems to have fitted two, hearing and seeing, more particularly for her fer- vice ; and other two, tasting and smelling, more grofs and material, for her dull and heavy confort, the body ; whereas the fifth, of tomhing, is of a middle nature, and in a manner equally fitted for the fervice of both, as will appear in the progrefs of the following difcourfe. Wherefore being here to fpeak of the interpretation of arbitrary ligns, imprefl by the ra- tional foule, and by it alone, upon the objeds of the fenfes moft fitted for that ufe, I will take notice of the moft ufual, or at leaft of the moft eafy and prafticable wayes of interpretation which either are, or may be. Here, reflecting upon Ariftotle's '^^^ k^i/^mia?, and '^■j^/ -^vx^?, I expeded both his help and authority in analyling the feveral kinds of interpretation ; but finding little or nothing to this purpofe in him, neither indeed in any other author of old or new philofophy, as wee now diftinguifti, that I have happened to look in, I was forced to adventure upon the following analy- fis for clearing my way, and enabling me to difcourfe the more diftindly on the fiibjeft argument. Interpretation, then, in its largeft fenfe, is an act of cognitive powei', ex- pressing the inward motions hy outward and sensible signs. Of this there are three kinds, 1. Supernatural, 2. Natural, 3. Artificial or Inftitutional, to which I give the names of Chrematology, Phyfiology, and Sematology. Chrematology is when Almighty God reveals his will by extraordinary means, as dreams, vifions, apparitions, &c., and this, in the divifion of Arts, falls under Divinity. Phyliology is when the internal paflions are exprefled by fuch external figns as have a natural connexion, by way of caufe and effed, with the paffion they difcover, as laughing, weeping, frowning, &c. and this way of interpretation being common to the brute with man, belongs to Natural Philofophy. And becaufe this goes not far enough to ferve the rational foul, therefore man has invented Sematology, that is, an art of impreffing the conceits of the mind upon fenfible and material objeds, which have not the leaft fliadow of affinity to the images 11(3 INTRODUCTION. of the things they carry impreft upon them ; and this is interpretation, in the ftrickeft and moll proper fenfe, and to reduce this wonderful effe6t of reafon to fuch rules of art as the nature of it requires, is the proper lubjed of ^rs Signm'iwi, which, according to the commonly received dif- tribution of Arts, is nothing elfe but a Rational Grammar. Sematology, then, being a general name for all interpretation by arbi- trary figns, or, to follow the moll ufual terms of art, voces e.v instituto, to any of the fenfes, it may, from the three fenfes, of hearing, feeing, and touching, whofe fervice the foul doth chiefly make ufe of in interpretation, be divided into Pneumatology, Schematology, and Haptology. Pneumatology, or if any think Echology more proper, is interpretation by founds conveied thro the ear; Schematology, by figures, to the eye; and Haptology, by a mutual contad, Ikin to Ikin. Pneumatology, again, is divided into GlolTology and Aulology; Gloflblogy is a term proper enough for interpretation by the tongue, which is the firll and moll common organ of interpretation, at leall in fociety, and face to face ; for man in thefe circumllances — effei't animi motus interprete Lhifjua. Aulology, fo llyled by an eafy trope, interprets by a mulical inllrument, which is fully capable of as much and manifell dillinftion as the tongue, but not fo na- tural and ready an organ. Schematology is divided into Typology or Grammatology, and Cheiro- logy or Daftylology. By Typology or Grammatology I underlland the imprelTmg of permanent figures upon folid and confilling matter, which may be done two wayes; either by the pen and hand, or by the impref- iion of llamps prepared for that ufe, which makes only an accidental diffe- rence between Grammatology and Typology. Cheirology or Daftylology, as the words import, is interpretation by the tranlient motions of the fin- gers, which, of all other wayes of interpretation, comes nearell to that of the tongue. Haptology admitting of no medium, nor dillinftion of aft and obje6t, but being body to body, doth therefore admitt of no fubdivilion. Tho I will not warrant all thefe terms from Acyrology, yet I am fure that they will both fave me the labour of periphrafis, and alfo from ufmg words lefs proper. DIDASCALOCOPHUS. CHAP. I. A DEAF MAN AS CAPABLE OF UNDERSTANDING AND EXPRESSING A LANGUAGE, AS A BLIND. THOUGH the foul of man come into the world, Tabula Rasa, yet is it withal, Tabula Cerata, capable, thro ftudy and difcipline, of having many fair and goodly images flampt upon it. This capacity is ac- tuated by the miniftry of bodily organs. The organs of the body, ferving the foul in exerting her powers in this Hate of union, are four, the eye and the ear, the hand and the tongue ; the firft pair fitted for taking in, the other for giving out ; both the one and the other equally neceffary for communication and fociety. That the ear and the tongue alone, fecluding the other two, can perfed a man in knowledge, excepting of fome few things which are the proper objeds of feeing, and enable him to exprefs what he knows in vocal ligns, or a language fpoken, is known by daily experience in blind people. That an equal degree of knowledge is attainable by the eye, and expreffible by the hand in characters, or a language written, is no lefs evident in the theory, for the reafons following. 118 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. All figns, both vocal and written, are equally arbitrary, and ex imtituto. Neither is there any reafon in nature, why the mind fliould more ealily apprehend the images of things impreft upon founds than upon characters, when there is nothing either natural or fymbolical in the one or the other. Therefore, that blind people lliould come fooner to fpeak and under- ftand, than dumb perfons to write and underftand, is not becaufe there is any more difcerning faculty in the ear than in the eye, nor from the na- ture of founds and chara6ters, that the one fhould have a greater fitnefs than the other to conveigh thofe notions impreft upon them thro the refpedive doors of the fenfes into the foul ; neither that pronounciation of articulate words is fooner or more eafily learned than written cliarafters ; neither yet, that the ear is quicker in perceiving its objcft than the eye ; but it is from other accidental caufes and circumftances, which give the ear many confiderable advantages, in the matter of communication, above the eye. And yet, even in this particular, the eye wants not its own pri- viledges, which, if rightly ufed, may perhaps outweigh the advantages on the other fide. For illuftrating this, I will compare a deaf man with a blind. 1. The blind man goes to fchool in his cradle : this fo early care is not taken of the deaf. 2. The blind man is ftill learning from all that are about him ; for every body he converfes with is a tutor, and every word he hears is a ledure to him, by which he either learns what he knew not, or confirms what he had. The deaf man, not being capable of this way of difcipline, has no teacher at all ; and tho neceffity may put him upon contriving and ufing a few figns, yet thofe have no affinity to the language by which they that arc about him do converfe amongft them- felves, and therefore are of little ule to him. 3. The blind man goes through the difcipline of language in the beft of his time, childhood, and under the beft of teachers, women and children : the deaf man is deprived of both thefe opportunities. 4. The blind man learns his language by the by, and aliud aqens ; the deaf cannot attain a language without inftru6tion, and the expenfe of much time and pains. 5. The deaf man is confined to the circumftances of light, diftance, pofture of body, both in himfelf, and him he communicates with : the blind man is free from thefe ftreightning cir- cumftances. DID ASCALOCOPHUS. 1 1 9 Laftly, all the advantages tlie ear has above the eye may be fummed up in thefe two. Firft, more opportunities of time; fecondly, quicker dif- patch, or doing more work in lefs time ; both which may be in a great mea- fure remedied by fkill and care ; by which, if there were a timely applica- tion made to deaf perfons, I conceive they might be more improved in knowledge, and fo their condition be much more happy than that of the blind, which will appear by the following advantages that the deaf man has above the blind. Firft, the deaf man has greater advantages of acquiring real knowledge than the blind ; becaufe the eye has greater variety of objefts than the ear. 2. The deaf man has a greater certainty of that knowledge he attains by the eye, than the blind can have of that he receives by the ear, for, Pluris est oculatus testis unus, quam auriti decern. 3. As he has the better of the other in the knowledge of nature, fo alfo he exceeds him much in fpeaking and reading the language of nature: for belides reading the glory and wifdom of God in the book of the Creation, he is able alfo to read much of the minds of men in the book of their countenance ; which, feconded witli the poftures, geftures, adions of the whole body ; more particularly, the indications of the hands, feet, fingers, and other circumftances, laies open much of their inlide to him ; and he, by the fame dumb eloquence, is able to notifie his defires to others, of which way of communication the blind man's condition renders him wholly uncapable. So that the one is able to prove himfelf a man, in any fociety of mankind, all the world over ; the other, take him from the company of his country-men, has little elfe left him wherewith to difference himfelf from a brute, but the childifh rheto- rick of Democritus and Heraclitus. But fourthly, to come clofer to our purpofe with the comparifon ; the deaf man learns a language by art, and exerciling his rational faculties ; the blind man learns by rote, fo that he gets a language, and he himfelf knov/s not how. There is, therefore, as great difference in the point of language between a deaf and a blind man, fuppofing both to have made an equal progrefs, as between one bred in the Univerfity, and a clown that knows not a letter. Fifthly, though the blind man have the ftart of the deaf, yet the deaf man will be too hard for him at the long run ; for he, after he has once got a competency of 1 20 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. language, will be able to help himfelf, and dire6t his own courfe in the further purfuit of all real knowledge. On the contrary, the blind man, who in learning a language needed no particular guide, becaufe every body was his guide, now he is at a Hand, and cannot fo much as advance one fbep without one to lead him. Sixthly, the deaf man has this great advantage above the blind, which weighs heavier than all that can be laid in the Icales againft it, that he is able to write down his notions, and re- fle6t upon them as often as he will. And now the advantage of having much time for ftudy, and doing much work in little time, is as much the deaf man's, as at firfl fetting out it was the blind man's. Seventhly, in the fuperfetation of language the deaf man will fooner be impregnate with a fecond or third language than the blind, infomuch as one language learned by ftudy and art, is a greater ftep to facilitate the learning of another, than the mother tongue, which comes by meer ufe and rote. CHAP. II. DEAF MAN CAPABLE OF AS EARLY INSTRUCTION IN A LANGUAGE AS A BLIND. Taking it for granted that deaf people are equal, in the faculties of ap- prehenfion and memory, not only to the blind, but even to thofe that have all their fenfes ; and having formerly ftiewn that thefe faculties can as eafily receive and retain the images of things, by the conveiance of figures thro the eye, as of founds thro the ear, it will follow that the deaf man is not only as capable, but alfo as foon capable of inftru6bion in letters as the blind man, and if we compare them, as to their intrinfick powers, has the advantage of him too, infomuch as he has a more diftin6t and perfed percep- tion of external objeds than the other. For the blind man has no certain knowledge of things without him, but what he receives from the informa- DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 121 tion of the grofs fenfe of feeling, which, tho it be a fure intelligencer, yet is its intelligence very fcanty ; for what he receives by the ear is but a fecond-hand knowledge, depending upon teftimony, and the credit of others. So that the advantages I gave the blind man at firft fetting out, are not in his own faculties, but from extrinfick and adventitious helps. Therefore I conceive there might be fuccefsful addreffes made to a dumb child, even in his cradle, when he begins — risu cognoscere matrem, if the mother or nurfe had but as nimble a hand, as commonly they have a tongue. For inftance, I doubt not but the words, hand, foot, dog, cat, hat, Sfc, written fair, and as often prefented to the deaf child's eye, pointing from the words to the things, and vice versa, as the blind child hears them fpoken, would be known and remembred as foon by the one as the other. And as I think the eye to be as docile as the ear, fo neither fee I any rea- fon but the hand might be made as tradable an organ as the tongue, and as foon brought to form, if not fair, at leaft legible charaders, as the tongue to imitate and echo back articulate founds. Here it may be doubted, whether it were more advifable to train up the deaf child in Typology or Da6tylology. For the firft it may be faid, that tho the inftitution is equally arbitrary in both, and therefore equally eafy to the learner ; yet writing is permanent, and therefore gives the young fcholar time to contemplate, and fo makes the deeper impref- iion ; whereas, pointing to the fingers is tranfient, and gone before it can be apprehended. This made me at firft incline more to writing, but upon further confideration I judge the other way much more expedient ; for, tho it cannot be denied but the permanency of the charaders is in it- felf an advantage, if well improved, yet tranfient motions, if often re- peated, make as great an impreflion upon the memory, as fixt and im- movable objefts. A clear proof of this we have from young ones learn- ing to underftand a language from the tranfient motions of the tongue ; and, which is yet more diflScult, to imitate the fame tranfient motions, where, neither can the diftindions be fo manifeft, nor the formation fo eafy, as in the hand-language : which, as it confirms me, that pointing to the hand would be the better way of teaching, fo it makes me think, that 122 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. if clofely followed, it might be eafier attained by young ones than fpeak- ing, infomuch as the motions of the hand are much more eafy than thofe of the tongue. If here it fliould be objeded, that words written are more diftind, and eafy to be apprehended, for, though confifting of feveral diftinft letters, yet, being joyned, they pafs in this rude difcipline for one individual fign, for our fcholar is fuppofed as yet to underftand nothing of the diftinftion of letters ; whereas, in pointing to the fingers, the diftin6t motions to make up a word will be more manifeft, and fo will be a hinderance to the fcholar's weak intention, to apprehend that which is reprefented by many touches fo diftinftly, under the notion of one word. To this I anfwer : If we compare the adion of writing with pointing to the fingers, this is much more limple than that, and therefore lefs amufing. But fecondly, if we compare words written with pointing, this is ftill not only more fimple, and therefore more eafily apprehended, but alfo it is as eafy to reprefent a word as one compositum with a continued a6tion of the hand, tho there be many diftin6t pointings, as to make one word by an aggregate of many diftin6t letters. Add to this, that point- ing to the hand is capable of more emphalis, for frequent repetition, ac- companied with fignificant geftures, will come near to the way of teaching viva voce, which inculcates more than the beholding of a Handing obje6t. But here there is need of caution that we follow the condu6t of nature, that is, to begin with words moft fimple and eafy ; for we fee that young children, when they begin to fpeak, are not able to pronounce long words, nor yet all letters. But here the only care to be taken is to chufe fliort words, for all letters are equally eafy. Now, before I proceed, I think it will be very proper to add fomething of the eafinefs of the whole ta(k, both to remove prejudices in others, and, more particularly, to encourage the careful mother the more cheerfully to undertake it. There are many mothers who, to their great praife, do teach their child- ren to read, even aim oft before they can fpeak. And yet, I hope, it will appear from the following confidcrations, that to read and write upon the fingers is much eafier to the learner, than to read and write in books, there being many difficulties in. the one which are avoided in the other. DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 1 23 For, 1. In reading, fingle letters mull bo learned, which are very remote, and abftra6ted from fenfe, as being but parts of a fign's lign, e. g. H is the fourth part of the word hand, which word written is a fign of the vocal found ; the vocal found is the immediate fign of the thing itfelf. 2. Next to this difficulty is the learning to name the fame letters in the precife abftra6ted notion of them, a, b, c, d, &c. without borrowing names to them from other things, contrary to what the firft fathers of letters have tauo-ht us, as appears by their naming the fimple elements ^kph, Beth, Gimel, Dakth, &c. And here, by the by, I cannot but obferve, that we Euro- peans have been fo dull fcholars as not to take out the lefTon ; yea our wife matters the Grecians, in this particular, are the greateft dunces of the reft ; for others have been truants and taken out no lelTon, and they have taken it out falfe ; for they have named them by barbarous and in- fignifieant words corrupted from the Hebrew, which is worfe than to name them by their own powers alone. Which hallucination of theirs has a remarkable providence in it ; for thereby they have given a con- vincing proof, and openly confefTed, though they neither defigned nor owned any fucli thing, that the dodors of Athens have learned their a b c at the feet of Gamaliel. And here amongft ourfelves and neighbouring nations, it is obfervable, that in this point of difcipline our dames are wifer than our dodors ; for they find a neceffity of bringing home thefe abftrafted notions to young ones' fenfes, by borrowing names from known and familiar things. But if there were one way of naming the fimple elements agreed upon, and this put in all Primers and Hornbooks, it would not only be of good ufe to children and unfkilful dames, but alfo, the thing being celebrated, would give occaiion to ingenious allufions and metaphors, an inftance whereof we have in a and n in the Greek. But to return to our purpofe. A third difficulty in reading is true pronouncia- tion of the ftmple letters. And, 4. joyning them in fyllables is yet more difficult, the iingle letters oftentimes either quite loling or changing their powers. And, 5. the dividing fyllables aright, and joyning them to make words. All which are fuch difficulties, that one may juftly wonder how young ones come to get over them ; and how late, and with how great pains they are overcome by fome, I appeal to thofe that know what 124 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. belongs to the breeding of youth. Now the deaf child under his mother's tuition, pafTes fecurely by all thefe rocks and quickfands. The diftindion of letters, their names, their powers, their order, the giving them true fliape or figure, which anfwers to others pronouncing true, the dividing words into fyllables, and of them again making words, to which may be added tone and accent ; none of thefe puzzling niceties hinder his pro- grefs. All the teacher has to do, is to go with one continued motion over all the points that make up the word, pointing withal to the things. And at firft it will be convenient to initiate the young fcholar with words of few letters and a near affinity ; as, hat, cat, hog, dog, hand, sand. It is true, after he has paft the difcipline of the nurfery, and comes to learn grammatically, then he mull begin to learn to know letters written, by their figure, number, and order. But the reft of the difficulties I have but now mentioned, are proper to the ear, and therefore do not concern him. And becaufe the advantages the blind man hath over the deaf, are more confiderably fuch in the time of childhood, it cannot be denied but the blind child is in a greater capacity of learning the mother tongue than the deaf ; yet fo as (kill and care might advance the deaf child in a voca- bulary of the names of vifible obje6ts much above what the other can be fuppofed to get from the common ufe of the mother tongue ; for the one is ftill running the fame round, in a narrow circle, hearing the fame words redundantly ; the other might be in a conftant progreffive motion. And tho I perfuade myfelf that, fome time or other, there may be a mother found who, by her own care, and fuch diredions as I am treat- ing of, will lay a good foundation of language in her deaf child, even in the firft ftage of his minority ; yet, feeing this is like to be but a rara avis, I will advance our blind and deaf fcholars to a higher form, and place them under a feverer difcipline than that of the nurfery, which I fuppofe none will deny them now able to bear ; for I will fuppofe them entred in the feventh year of their age. Together then with this equality of age, let us fuppofe them every other way equal in their natural parts, both faculties and inclinations, under tutors equally both fkilful and careful ; and to make their capacities every way equal, the deaf boy to write as fair DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 125 and quick a hand as can be expeded from tliaf age. In thefe circum- ftances, they are both of them to begin to learn a language, the blind boy Latin, the deaf boy his mother's tongue. The cafe being thus Hated, it is my own opinion that the deaf boy would come to read and write the mother tongue, both much better and fooner than the blind boy to underftand and fpeak the Latin. For rea- fons of my fo thinking, befide what may be gathered from Chap. I., I will here carry on the comparifon betw^een the blind boy and the deaf, in fome particulars coming clofer to our prefent cafe. 1. The blind boy has the advantage of knowing a language already, which is a great help to the learning any fecond language ; for tho there be no affinity between the words of fome languages, yet there is fomething of a natural and univerfal grammar runs thro all languages, wherein all agree. This contradifts not what I have faid to the deaf man's advantace. Chap. I. Num. 6. Becaufe there the blind and deaf are fuppofed both to underftand the mother tongue, when they begin to learn a fecond language. Here the deaf is fuppofed to have no language, and the blind to have the mother tongue, which tho by him learned, not by rule, but by rote, yet is it an advantage over him that has none. 2. Beiide this notion of natural and univerfal grammar, which the blind boy hath got with the mother tongue ; he not being to learn words for things, but words for words ; and it falling out fo, that oftentimes there is a great affinity between the words to be learned and the words for which they are to be learned ; this makes that he learns with lefs pains than the deaf boy, who learning words for things, it can never happen that a com- bination of alphabetical charaders making up a word, ihould have any affinity to, or refemblance of the thing for which it is, fubftituted. 3. Onomatopoeia is a great help to the blind fcholar ; for example, grim- mftis, hinnitus, rugitus, ulidatus, &c, are eafier to be learned by the blind man than the deaf ; becaufe, as they pafs in founds thro the ear, they are of a mixt inftitution, partly natural, partly arbitrary; but thefe fame words written in charaders are of a meer arbitrary inftitution, whether they be coniidered with relation to the immediate, or mediate sifpiatim. So that our dumb fcholar has nothing to truft to but diligence and ftrength s 126 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. of memory : realbn can do liim no fervice at all, at lead fo far as either primitive words, or ^vords of an irregular inflexion from them extend, which make up the body of all languages. Neither can fancy help him much, which oftentimes is of great ufe by working a connexion between a itrange and a known word, becaufe as yet we fuppofe moft words to be ftrangers to him. The reafon of this difference between words Ipoken and written is, be- caufe fpeaking, being before writing, has more of nature and lefs of art in it ; for all languages guided by the inftin6l of nature, have more or lefs of Onomatopoeia in them, and I think our Englifh as much as any ; for, be- (ide the naming the voices of animals, and feme other mufical founds, which for the moll part is done by this figure in other languages, we ex- tend it often to more obfcure and indiftinft founds. Take for example, ivash, dash, plash, flash, clash, hash, lash, slash, trash, gash, ^c. So grumble, tumble, crumble, jumble, fumble, stumble, bumble, mumble, 8^'C., of which kind of words, the learned, and my worthy friend Dr. Wallis has given a good ac- count in his Englifh Grammar. In all thefe and fuch like words there is fomething fymbolizing, and analogous to the notions of the things, which makes them both more emphatic and eafy to the memory. But in words literally written, and of a meer arbitrary inftitution, there can be nothing fymbolical. But to draw fomething out of this digreffion to our prefqnt Hated cafe : tlio Onomatopoeia gives our blind fcholar feme advantage over his deaf fchoolfellow, yet is it fhort of what it would be if he were learn- ing Englifli. This is all that at prefent comes into my thoughts to fay for maintaining the paradox of a blind guide. I will now offer my reafons for giving him the precedency that has two eyes open in his head, which feems to be the more plaufible opinion. 1 . The deaf man's mind is like clean paper, and therefore takes the im- preffion the more eafily, fair and diflind ; whereas the fcriblings and blottings upon the table of the blind man's memory, as they leave little room for new impreffions, fo they breed confufion, and make him ready to miftake, when he comes to read them. 2. Words laid up in the deaf boye's memory, are like charaders engraven in fbeel or marble ; the blind boye's words are but chalked out, or yiigro DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 127 carbone notata, and therefore eafily defaced. For the deaf boy having but one word for every thing he knows, is therefore obliged to refled upon it as often as he has occafion to think or fpeak of tlie thing itfelf ; and it is this frequency of recognizing words, and ufing them upon all occafions, that makes a man mafter of a language : whereas the blind boy having two words for one thing, the one an intimate and old acquaintance, even a teneris unguicuUs, the other a ftranger to him ; upon all occafions he loves to converfe with his old crony, and keeps at a diftance from the ftranger, unlefs it be at fet times, when force or fear commands his attendance. So that this confideration alone, fpecially if it be feconded with the care and diligence of thofe that are about him, in forbearing all other figns with him but letters, may feem to outweigh all that can be faid for the blind boy. 3. The deaf boy can conn a leflbn by himfelf, for litera scripta manet; the blind boy can do nothing without one prompting him, for voa? perit Laftly, I think none will deny but that it ftands with reafon, that a deaf fcholar mull be exa^t in orthography. But for the blind, I know it by experience, that it will be a hard matter to make him fpell true. CHAP. III. OF A DEAF MAN S CAPACITY TO SPEAK. That a deaf man may be taught to Ipeak, is no more a doubt to me, than that a blind man may be taught to write ; both which I think not only poffible, but alfo not very difficult. I will carry on the comparifon in fe- veral particulars. 1. Both have the refpedive organs, the tongue and the hand, equally entire, and in a capacity to a6t. 2. Both are equally delli- tute of their proper guides, the eye and the ear, to direct them in ading ; and therefore, 3. both muft be equally obliged to the fenfe of feeling for direction. 128 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. And yet fo magifterial are the fenfes of hearing and feeing, tliat tho the fenfe of feeling alone may guide the tongue and hand in fpeaking and wTiting, after a habit is acquired, yet, for introducing this habit, diredions from the eye and ear are neceffary. And, which is obfervable in this point of difcipline, the eye and ear feem to aft out of their own fphere, and to exchange their ftations and powers, for the blind man learns to write by the ear, and the deaf man to fpeak by the eye ; from which to infer that community of fenfes Miiich fome philofophers and phyficians fpeak of, I think would be abfurd, the external objects ftill remaining diftinft : but the true inference from this will be, that the foul can exert her powers by the miniftry of any of the fenfes ; and therefore when ilie is deprived of her principal fecretaries, the eye and the ear, then llie muft be contented Avith the fervice of her lacqueys and fcullions the other fenfes, which are no lefs true and faithful to their miftrefs than the eye and the ear, but not fo quick for difpatch. But to go on with the comparifon. 4. It will be hard to teach the deaf man to obferve tone, accent, and emphafis in fpeaking ; fo will it be as hard to bring the blind man to write a fair hand, or diverfe hands ; yet the one may fpeak fo as to be underftood, and the other write fo as what he writes may be read. 5. As there may be more fimple, and therefore more eafy characters to be written, contrived for the ufe of the blind man, fo may there founds of an eafier pronounciation than any in common ufe, be invented for the ufe of the deaf. 6. They are equally uncapable, the one of fmging, the other of flourifhing and painting. 7- As the deaf man has this advantage above the blind, that fpeaking, in common com- merce and bufinefs, is of more frequent and greater ufe than writing ; fo the blind man comes even again with him in this, that there is one way of AATiting, and that of great ufe too to the deaf man, which the blind can learn both as foon and to as great a degree of perfedion as the deaf, whereas the deaf man cannot learn to fpeak without much time and pains, and yet can never come to perfedion in Ipeaking. This way of writing is by an alphabet upon the fingers. 8. As to any dired tendency of im- proving either of them with knowledge or difpatch of bufinefs and con- verfe in vita communis I judge them both equally ufelefs, or at lead of no DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 129 very great ufe ; becaufe I think fcarce attainable to that degree of pcr- fedion, as to be ready for ufe upon all occafions. That there may be cafes wherein they may be of great ufe I do not deny. And of feveral that offer themfelves, I will fmgle out that of a blind mafter and deaf fervant, for Hating of which the more clearly, I will pre- mife ; 1. That to read and write is a commendation in a fervant. 2. It recommends him the more if he be to ferve a blind mafter. And, 3. if his blind mafter be a man of much bufinefs or learning, this enhanfes his fervice yet the more. Thefe things premifed, let our cafe be this. Blind Homer hearing of an ingenious but deaf flave, called ^Efop, who was trained up in all the fore-mentioned waies of Sematology, and he himfelf being expert in Daftylology, he refolved to purchafe ^Efop at any rate. The firft fervice he puts him upon, was to write out his Ilias fair, from his own blotted copy ; and, becaufe iEfop could fcarce read his hand, he was alwaies prefent himfelf, correding the faults of his pen upon his fingers. And here I leave them for a while till I have refolved another material doubt. That which is my main defign in this Treatife, to teach how to come to underftand a language by reading and writing, fuggefts to me here to refolve this queftion — How a blind perfon might communicate Avith a dumb ? The caufe of doubting being upon the dumb man's part, I anfwer — The defe6t of his tongue muft be fupplied with a mufical inftrument, having the letters equally diftinguifhed upon the keys or ftrings, both to the eye of the dumb, and in the founds to the ear of the blind ; which I take for granted might produce the fame effeds with oral fpeech. And here it is obfervable, that that fame adion would very properly be both writing and fpeaking ; writing, from the hand of the dumb touching the keys or ftrings ; fpeaking, to the ears of the blind man, from the found of the inftrument. After this fhort enterlude, let us bring Homer and ^fop upon the ftage again. The old man was mightily plcafed with iEfop, till, unfortunately, on a certain time, the fluttering of his tongue gave Homer occafion to fufped him of a ly, for which, in a fudden paffion, he cuts out his tongue ; but afterwards repenting what he had done, refolved not to put him away, 1 30 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. for he conlidered that he was yet as capable of ferving him as ever ; and perhaps more, the other waies of interpretation that he was (killed in being more difbinct than Gloflblogy could be in a deaf man. It happened foon after, that Homer had invited fome friends to dinner, commanding ^fop to provide the greateft rarities the market did afford. jEfop made a fliow of great preparation, but fet nothing upon the table befide the tip of his own tongue in a large difh ; upbraiding his mafter with his pype, that he did not tear his blotted papers when he could not read them, but had patience till he himfelf correfted them upon his fingers. Homer not enduring this affront before ftrangers, throws jEfop's pype in the fire. jEfop fearing worfe to follow, throws himfelf at his mafter's feet, taking him by the hand, and by the rules of Haptology begs his pardon, promifing if he would have patience, to make amends for his fault. Homer flartled at this, to find both a tongue and a pype in ^fop's fingers, was tranfported from wrath to fear and admiration, concluding for certain that ^fop was a conjurer, and that he deferved to be thrown in the fire after his pype. Yet refolving once more to try his wit and honefty, and for making iatif- faftion to his friends who had lofl their dinner, he invites them to return to-morrow, charging ^fop to provide the oldeft and leanefl carrion he could find. The night following, jEfop ferves his blind mafler with lex talionis, tongue for tongue, and repeated the fame dinner to his friends the next day ; exculing the matter, that he had from firft to lafl obeyed his mafler's commands to the bell of his judgment. Homer taking it ill to be fo often outwitted by a flave, by Dadylology begs of his provoked friends to revenge him upon jEfop, by plucking out his eyes ; that his condition might not be more comfortable than his own. After this, old age and a fit of ficknefs deprived Homer of his hearing. This reconciled him again to ^fop ; for he judged him the fitteft companion he could find, with whom to bemoan his folly and mifery. After this, they lived good friends, paffing the time in telling old (lories; fometimes upon their fingers' ends, and fometimes with hand in hand, traverfing the alphabetical Ilias. This drama being a6ted according to the rules of art, if there be any certainty in art that the promifed eflfeds will follow, is no lefs true than it feems to be ilrange. And from this we may learn two things : 1 . That DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 131 tho hearing and feeing be the principal, yet are they not the only fenfes of knowledg. 2. That the hand is, or at leaft is capable of being made, a more ferviceable organ of interpretation to the foul than the tongue : for it has accefs to its miftrefs's prefence by the door of three fenfes ; 1. Of hearing, by Aulology ; 2. Of feeing, by both fpecies of Schematology, to wit. Typology and Dadylology ; 3. Of feeling, by Haptology ; whereas the tongue can only enter by the door of one fenfe, and do its meffage only by one kind of interpretation, Glolfology. CHAP. IV. OF A DEAF MAN S CAPACITY TO UNDERSTAND THE SPEECH OF OTHERS. I COME now to the deaf man's capacity of underftanding the fpeech of others. That words might be gathered and read, from the tranfient motions and configurations of the mouth, if all the feveral diftinftions of letters were no lefs manifeft and apparent to tlie eye than to the ear from the fpeaker's face, as readily as from permanent charaders upon paper, is not to be doubted : but that all the diftindions that are perceived by the ear in fpeaking, cannot equally be perceived by the eye, I will prove by an argument, which tho it be a posteriori, yet I hope it will be of evidence and force fufficient to effect what is thereby intended. If the fame dillinftions of letters and words did appear to the eye from the motion of the fpeaker's mouth, which are difcernable to the ear from the articulation of his voice, then it would follow, that the capacity of a deaf man would be equal to that of a dumb, but not deaf, for learning a language, fo far at leaft as to underftand it. But the capacity of a deaf man is not equal to that of a dumb, for learn- ing a language from fpeaking. Therefore all the diftin6tions of letters are not manifeft to the deaf man, from the fpeaker's mouth. 132 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. The fequel of the major is, I think, clear from what has been laid before; there being nothing in founds to the ear either natural or fymbolical, more than in motion and figures to the eye. And if any fliould fay, that it is not fo eafy to read tranfient motions of the lips, even fuppofing them fufficiently diftind, which muft alwaies be fuppofed, as permanent cha- racters ; to this firft, I oppofe reading from poynting to a finger alphabet, Avhich is nothing but motion. 2. All reading from whatfoever immovable objed, is as properly motion as hearing ; for if there be no motion in the obje6t, then it muft be in the organ of the eye ; which alters not our cafe, more than the Earth's motion or reft alters the plisenomena of Aftronomy. If here it fliould be urged, that granting figns to the eye to be as fit for teaching as figns to the ear ; and, therefore, that a deaf perfon muft be fuppofed to be in as great a capacity of learning to underftand a language fpoken, as a blind, wlien the diftindions to the eye and ear are the fame ; yet, that the blind man learns to underftand a language from hearing- others fpeak, when the deaf man learns not to underftand from feeing others fpeak, is from the advantages the ear hath above the eye. To this I anfwer — that all the advantages the ear hath over the eye, will be confiftent enough with the deaf man's capacity of learning to under- ftand a language from fpeaking. It is true here, that the eye is ftill at the lofs of equal opportunities of time with the ear ; but the other advan- tage I gave the ear over the eye, of doing more work in lefs time, is here quite taken away ; and yet the deaf man will ftill have as much opportu- nity of time, if there were no other defeft, if his nurfe and all that are about him be not dumb, as fufficiently to inculcate the common notions of language : for tho young people learn a language by hearing others Ipeak, yet the greateft part of what they hear is redundant, and, like rain falling into a full conduit, runs over. So that a deaf man, tho he have not fo much opportunity of learning as a blind, yet has he opportunities enough, and to fpare, for learning the common notions of language. Now for the minoi', fo far as concerns the deaf man, it is known by fad experience, that he learns no language from his mother or nurfe. And for the dumb perfon, tho I can bring no inftance, yet the cafe feems to me fo clear, that I think nobody doubts of it, and therefore I will not enlarge to prove it. DIDASCALOCOPHUS. I33 Put tho the deaf man be not able to perceive all the diftinftions of letters, neither indeed is it poffible for him, the various motions by which fome of them are differenced not appearing outwardly, yet if he be inge- nious, I judge that he perceives a great many ; and, therefore, I doubt not but deaf perfons underftand many things, even without teaching, further than what they have from their nurfe. Tho here I muft add, that they could underftand but very little from the motion of the lips, which, when moft diftin6t, muft be full of ambiguity and sequivocalnefs to them, with- out other circumftances concurring. For when dumb people make it appear, that they underftand many things that pafs in difcourfe where they are prefent, children and fools cannot be perfwaded but they hear ; fuper- ftitious and ignorant people think they have a familiar fpirit ; otliers, defpifmg the folly of the one, and impiety of the other, do judge that they are able by the eye, as diftinftly to receive words from the fpeaker's mouth, as others by the ear. But the truth is, what they underftand is from a concurrence of circumftances, many of which are often as material as the motion of the fpeaker's lips ; fuch as, his eyes, countenance, time, place, perfons, &c. To determine what or how many diftin6bions of letters the eye is able to difcover in the fpeaker's face, there can be no man fo fit to refolve this doubt as the deaf man. And if there be no miftake in that well known pafTage of Sir Kenelm Digby, a Spanifli deaf Lord hath already refolved it fo as to refute and deftroy all that I have faid. What is there faid of him will amount to this — That the eye can perceive all the diftin6tions of letters, in the fpedcer's face, whicli the ear can do in his voice. I let pafs that which increafeth the wonder, that this Spanifli Lord fliould be able not only to know ftrange letters, in ftrange languages, inftantly, but alio to be able to imitate them, tho he had never been taught. To neglect the teftimony of a perfon both of honor and learning, who was an ear and eye-witnefs of all he relates, and had nothing to byafs him from what he judged to be exa6t truth, and, which is more, calling to witnefs to that relation a perfon much greater than himfelf, and beyond all exception for veracity, this would not only be difmgenuous, but alio arrogant. Therefore I will fay what feems moft probable to me for recon- T 134 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. ciling that relation to the truth. I will then firft fuppole, that Sir Kenelm Digby had not much confidered this weaknefs of human nature, nor of the way to remedy it, and therefore might be the more credulous, for I find nothing of fufpition or caution that he might not be impofed upon, and ready, as we are all in ilrange things, to magnify this rare and won- derful art, which, 'tis like, he had never leen nor heard of before, and perhaps had even judged fucli performances impoffible. Secondly, I will fuppofe that the prieft, the Lord's tutor, was ambitious to fet off his art with all the advantages poffible, before fo great a perfonage as the heir of the Crown of England. Thefe things being fuppofed, I take it for granted, that the prieft has ufed artifices of leger-de-main in thefe paifages that feem moft ftrange. What thefe have been, fuppofing the matter of fa6t to be true, tho was I not there an eye-witnefs, yet, without conjuring, I can tell as certainly as if I had been a fpeftator, or an a6tor in that fcene. 1. His keeping up difcourfe with others has been done in fet forms, to a6ling of which he has been trained up before hand. 2. For returning any words that came from the mouth of another, this he has been prompted to by his tutor, or any other ftanding by, with a finger alphabet. 3. As for his echoing back Irifli and Welfli words, two things may be faid. Firft, That he might have been taught to found thefe guttural letters which occur often in thefe languages, and were as eafy to him as any other letters whatfoever ; or, fecondly, becaufe it is there faid that the prieft affirmed that he per- formed fome things which were beyond the rules of his art, I know nothing can be faid, but that he might perhaps chance upon the true found of thefe letters, or fomething near them, which the relator thought good to reprefent, with all his other performances, becaufe indeed wonderful to thofe that never had feen, or heatd of the like, or knew by what art they were performed, to the greateft advantage. As for his returning words whifpered at the diftance of the breadth of a large room, there is no new wonder in this ; for whifpering and fpeaking loud were all one to him : but I fufpe6t that this, as well as other things, has been a fet leffon, or the prieft did micare digitis. I am not ignorant, that many of Sir Kenelm's relations are looked upon DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 1 35 as fabulous and hyperbolical. Well, be it fo, and let this be as fabulous as any of them. It is not the esse, but the posse of the ftory, that I con- cern my felf to maintain. That feveral paffages related there are impof- fible, and other circumftances very hyperbolical in that fenfe in which he underftands them, I think I have fufficiently proved ; and yet, that the whole relation might be true in that fenfe I have put upon it, I hope I have made no lefs evident. CHAP. V. OF THE MOST EFFECTUAL WAY TO FILL A DEAF MAN'S CAPACITY. Hitherto I have been taking meafures of the deaf man's capacity. I come now to confider of the way to fill it. And here my defign is not to give a methodical fylteme of grammatical rules, but only fuch general diredions whereby an induftrious tutor may bring his deaf pupil to the vulgar ufe and &V/ of a language, that fo he may be the more capable of receiving inftruftion in the h} on from the rules of grammar, when his judg- ment is ripe for that ftudy. Or more plainly, I intend to bring the way of teaching a deaf man to read and write, as near as poffible to that of teaching young ones to fpeak and underftand their mother-tongue. I will begin with a fecret, containing the whole myftery of the art of inftrufting deaf perfons ; that is, I will defcribe fuch a powerful engine, as may be able to fill his head as full of the imagery of the world of words of man's making, as it is of the things of this vifible world created by Almighty God ; which engine Ihall have one property more, that it Ihall not fail of fuccefs, even fuppofing both mailer and fcholar to be the next degree to dunces. Here, methinks, I fee the reader fmiling at this fortimam Priami, and hear him whifpering to himfelf partiirhmt monies, 8fc. But I hope, before I have done with my notion, to reconcile him fo far to it, as to bring him 1 36 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. to judge that there is fometliing eonfiderable in it ; and tho at firft he meet not with all that this hiafics may feem to have promifed, yet at laft he may meet with fomething more than he expefted. This powerful and fuccefsful engine is not the tongue of the learned, but the hand of the dilio-ent. The hand of a diligent tutor will not fail to make a rich Icholar, if copia verhmmm may deferve the name of riches. Diligence will be that fame virtue in our deaf fcholar's tutor, that Denlofthenes makes aftion to be in his eloquent Orator. Let the deaf child then have for his nurfes, not the nine mufes, but the nine magpyes ; let him be fent to fcllOol, not to croXi/iTir/s 'Ohvediug, but tO d/Mir^Oi'Trrig Qi^airri?. Diligence, you will fay, is powerful in all arts. True it is, yet as a handmaid ; but here 1 think, that without a catachresis^ I may call it the principal point of art. This, with very few diredions from art, will do the work effe6lually ; all the fine tricks of art, which the wit of man can con- trive, will be ineffedual without this. The only point of art here is, how to make an application to your deaf fcholar, by the fame diftinftion of letters and words to his eye, which appear to the ears of others from words fpoken ; that is, to know his letters and to write them readily ; diligence will do the reft. For example ; let the fame words be feen and written as often by the deaf man, as they have been heard and fpoken by the blind ; if their faculties of memory and underftanding be equal, the meafure of knowledge alfo will be* equal. But here it will be neceftary that I explain what I mean by diligence. By diligence I underftand two things; 1. That which is properly fo called, both in the mafter and fcholar. This Sir Kenelm Digby calls much ])atience and conftancy, in the experiment upon the Spanifli Lord. 2. Many other adventitious helps. I fummed up the advantages the ear hath above the eye into thefe two ; 1. Having more opportunities of time; 2. Doing more work in lefs time. Here I will fliew how diligence, with a few direftions from art, may in a good meafure remedy this inequality. It is a received maxim amongft thofe who have employed their thoughts in that fucceflefs enquiry about a perpetual motion — Reconcile time and ftrength, and this will produce a perpetual motion. The application is eafy from wliat 1 liave faid before, comparing the deaf man with the blind. DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 1 37 Let them have equal time and force of ading, and their proficiency will be equal. That care and diligence both in the general and the particulars following, may remedy this inequality in a great meafure, I think no body will doubt. Neither ought this to be any difcouragement, that the recon- ciling time and ftrength, as to a geometrical equality, is not poffible ; for it is not here as in the perpetual motion : there, if you fail of a minute, or a dram, all ySur labour is loft ; here nothing is loft, but juft fo much as you come ftiort of him you compare with. How much this is, we will lee by the particulars following. 1. If the deaf fcholar could be brought to fpeak readily, this would leffen the inequality of force by one-half; and if it were poffible that he could read the fpeaker's words from his face, this would make a geome- trical equality of force in the eye and ear ; fo that the only inequality would be then in time, the eye being confined to light, bodily pofture, and diftance ; and out of thefe circumftances, the deaf and dumb man were perfectly cured. But, becaufe I am diftruftful of this cure, for which I have given my reafons, Chap. IV, I will confine myfelf to reading and writing, moft properly fo called, as both the more certain and perfed cure. Here the firft piece of diligence muft be, frequens exercitatio styli^ that is, as I underftand it in this place, ufing the pen and fingers much. If this be fo neceflary for forming an orator, as Cicero teaches us in his de Oratore, inculcating it with ut scepe jam dim, who has the ufe of the two principal organs of eloquence entire, how much more muft it here be necelTary where the pen muft be both pen and tongue. Great care, there- fore, muft be taken, to keep your fcholar clofe to the pradice of writing ; for, until he can not only write, but alfo have got a quick hand, you muft not think to make any confiderable progrefs with him. It is true, that it were poffible to teach a deaf man to read without teaching him to write, as one may learn to underftand a language fpoken and not to fpeak it ; but this would be but half a cure, and leave your fcholar uncapable of fociety. And, becaufe the conveniency of writing cannot alwaies be in a readi- nefs, another great help will be to have tahulce deletiks, of ftone or black wood hanging up, for expedition, in feveral convenient places. A third help will be to have feme common forms written in thofe tables, there to 1 38 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. continue, and to be filled up as occafion requires, like Virgil's Sic vos jion vobis, Sfc. fuch as, PVhere is f I pray, give me ! TVIiof Whenf HHiatf &c. Thefe may ferve not only for expedition, but by them alfo your fcholar may be taught to vary. Pocket table-books may fometimes be more ready than thefe. Fourthly, When neither of thefe is in a readinefs, then pradice by an alphabet upon the fingers ; which, by frequent pra6tice, as it is the readieft, fo it may become the quickeft way of intercourfe and communication with dumb perfons. But I fhall have occafion to enlarge more on this. Chap. VIII. Fifthly, Another piece of ufeful care will be, to keep him from any other way of figning, than by letters. Sixthly, Add to this, that his familiars about him be officious in nothing, but by the intercourfe of letters, that is, either by Grammatology, or Da6tylology. If now, lallly, I can make it appear that diligence out-weighs wit in our prefent cafe, I hope my former flafli will not be thought to have ended in fmoke. And this, methinks, is eafily underllood from obvious and daily inftances ; do not we fee that young ones, tho of very weak parts for underftanding Grammar, yet come as foon, and fome of them fooner, to underftand and fpeak a language by ufe, without art, than thofe of ftronger parts. One boy has gone to fchool feven years, and yet underftands not the common accidents of Grammar ; another in the half of that time, is able to expound an author, and refolve all the grammatications that occur, to a tittle : take the fame two at play, or in things where there is no occafion to fliew their learning, you will often find that the flow boy, for the nimblenefs of his tongue, and copia verborum, may feem to exceed the other, as far as he doth him in art. Hence it will feem to follow, that the principal point of art in teaching a flow fcholar, is to ufe no other art but that of diligence ; and if fo, a fecond inference will be, that there is none fo fit to teach a flow fcholar as a flow mafter ; that is, one dunce to teach another. This I know will feem ridiculous and abfurd to many, yet I declare, that I am much of this mind in earnefl;, in our prefent cafe, where Grammar is excluded. For an acute man will be impatient, and not able to ftoop fo much as the other. And to clear this further, I think it will be eafily aflc-ntod to, that a prat- tling nurfe is a better tutrix to her fofl;er-child, than the mofl; profoundly learned doftor in the univerfity. DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 139 My laft inftance, therefore, fliall be — Take mailer and fcliolar, qualified as before, adding diligence as I have defcribed it, and let a liberal reward be propofed to the mailer ; if the work be not effeftually done, let me be the dunce for them both. If, therefore, this cure may fo ealily be performed, what a reproach is it to mankind, that fo little compalfion is Ihewn to this infirmity of human nature ; thefe wretched impotents being not only negle6ted in the point of education, like brutes, but alfo, as if this were not unkindnefs enough, the laws of men do moll inhumanly deprive them of many priviledges wherein the comfort of life conlills. As for former ages, I confefs they are to be excufed ; for tho, as I have been proving, diligence be the prin- cipal point of art, yet was this a fecret to them ; but in this knowing age, in which proofs have been given both at home and abroad, that this weak- nefs is cureable in a good meafure ; and, if the reafons contained in thefe papers have any weight, cureable even to perfeftion, fo far at leall as concerns the better part of the man ; that is, thefe impotents may not only be inllru6ted in the common notions of language, which is the bond of human fociety, but alfo from this foundation may be raifed the fuper- llru6ture of all other arts, which are either for ufe or ornament to human nature : I fay then, for us to negle6b fo worthy and noble an experiment, and fo great an obje6t of charity and compalfion, were at once to degene- rate from the charity of our ancellors, and to make their ignorance pre- ferable to our knowledge. CHAP. VI. OF A DEAF man's DICTIONARY. Tho a diligent inculcating of the common forms of a language, following no other rule or method but that of the nurfery, would undoubtedly bring the deaf man to underlland and write it fo as the vulgar underlland and 1 40 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. fpeak it; yet fome direftions from art, fpecially if your fcholar be inge- nious, will both facilitate the work, and do it much better ; that is, it will make him underftand the nature of words better, and fo prepare him for the ftudy of grammar, as alfo the nature of things for which he fees words fubllituted, and fo prepare liim for the purfuit of other arts. I will, therefore, give a few fuch diredions, whereby the teacher, abftaining from rules and words of art, may be enabled to produce the proper effefts of art in his fcholar. But iirft I will refolve two preliminary queries : 1. What language is eafieft to be learned? 2. And what language will be the moft ufeful ? For thefirft, a language of a Philofophical Inftitution or a Real Charader, would be by much the moft eafy ; as being free from all anomaly, sequivocalnefs, redundancy, and unneceffary grammatications ; and the whole inftitution being fuited to the nature of things, this verbal know- ledge would not only come more eafily, but alfo bring with it much real knowledge. Secondly, The language of greateft ufe to be learned, will be that of the place where he lives, and of the people with whom he is to converfe. And here with us, the deaf man has feveral advantages aj^ove other nations. Firft, That our Englifti is freer from anomaly and aequivocalnefs, at leaft in writing, which is enough for him, than many other languages. Second, It is not fo much clogged with inflexions as other languages ; and, third, our words are for the moft part monofyllables, and therefore more eafy to be remembred. I come now to the promifed direftions. I will make way for particulars by obferving, firft, in general, that the way of teaching here, muft be fomething mixt, and as it were middle between the grammatical way of the fchool, and the more rude difcipline of the nurfery. The firft initiation muft be purely grammatical ; but when your fcholar is got over this difficulty, of knowing and writing his letters readily, then imitate the way of the nurfery. Let utile and jucundum^ variety and neceflity, invite and fpur him on, fpecially if he be young or of a lache temper. You muft not be too grammatical in teaching till you find his capacity will bear it : he muft not be dealt with as fchool-boyes, who are often DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 1 41 punifhed for not learning what is above their capacity. It is enough for him to underftand the word or fentence propofed, without parfing every word and fyllable ; for this is all the ufe of language that not only children but even people of age that are illiterate have ; they underftand the meaning of what is fpoken, but can neither tell how many words, fyllables, or letters came from the Ipeaker's mouth. So that the having the vulgar ufe of a language, and the underftanding it grammatically are very different things. And this prepofterous way of learning the learned languages, firft Gram- mar and then the language, is the caufe of fo flow progrefs in thofe that apply themfelves to the ftudy of them. The firft exercife you muft put your fcholar upon, is to know his letters written or printed, and upon his fingers, and to write them himfelf ; and when he comes to joyn, let his copies be of fuch words as he may be taught to underftand ; fo that at once he may be learning both to write, and underftand the meaning of what he writes. When you have got him to write fair, keep him to conftant practice, that you may bring him to write a quick hand, which his condition requires. Let him begin to learn the names of things beft known to him, how heterogeneous foever ; fuch as the elements, minerals, plants, animals, parts, utensils, garments, meats, 8fc. and generally the names of all fuch corporeal fubftances, natural or artificial ; not only abfolute, but relative, vl% father, brother, master, servant; as alfo names of oflfices and profeflions, as cook, butler, page, groom, taylm\ barber, 8fc. ; for all thefe will be as eafily apprehended as the moft diftinft fpecies of natural bodies. Let his nomenclature be written down fair, and carefully preferved, not only in a book, but on one fide of a flieet of paper, that it may be afiixt over againft his eye in convenient places. And let this his di6tionary be forted three waies : 1, Alphabetically; 2. Following the order of double confonants, both in the beginning and the end of a word ; 3. Reducing it to feveral heads or claftes, with refpeft not to the words but the things, as in Junius' Nomenclator ; for every one of thefe methods will be of good ufe to him. After he has got a good ftock of thefe concrete fubftantives, then pro- ceed to adjectives ; namely, fenfible qualities, quantity, with fome metaphy- u 1 42 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. lical notions ; which all of them almoft admit of proper contraries, which illuftrate one another, and therefore will be of great ufe to the learner. Let him be made to underftand adjedives by joyning them to their proper fubjeds, taken out of his vocabulary of fubftantives already underftood, as hard iron, stone, bone, Sfc. soft silk, wool, cloth, Sfc. And fometimes inftance the two contraries in that fame fubjed, as iron hot, cold ; and thus he will make a further advance to complex notions. Obferve here, that by the help of an almanack and watch, it will be eafy to make your fcholar underftand all the differences and words of that difficult notion of time. After he has pradifed fufficiently upon complex notions of fubftantives and adjedives, let him proceed to words of adion, whether bodily or fpiritual, which Grammarians call verbs, as break, cut, hold, take, laugh, affirm, deny, desire, love, hate, SfC. And thus much fhall be enough to have been faid of his didionary, in this rude difcipline under which we fuppofe him as yet to be. Here I would have it well obferved, that tho in applying myfelf to the deaf man's tutor I have followed fomething of method, docendi causa, yet I do not advife him to take this courfe with his fcholar ; but, as I faid before that the names of things beft known to him, how heterogeneous foever, were to be firft learned, fo here I fay that there is no regard to be had to the cognation, or grammatical affinity of words. In a word, occa- lion will be the beft miftrefs of method, till he have made a conftderable advance ; and then, when his didionary begins to be numerous, it will be neceftary to draw it up in rank and file. Nay further, I am fo far from advifmg to follow any method at firft but what is occafional, excepting only the ftated and fixt order of letters in the alphabet, that if your fcholar be not very young, you may propofe fentences as early to him as fingle words ; efpecially interrogatives and imperatives, as, Where is your hat ? Whose hat is this ? Who gave you this apple f Rise up, sit down, give me the cup, shut the dom\ Sfc. And thefe may be eafily varyed, indicatively, infinitively, affirmatively, negatively, &c. And yet for all this, I cannot deny but the teacher may, and muft con- trive fome metliod for himfelf, even of thofe things which he has taught. DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 143 following occafion and his pupil's capacity, that he may know the better to take the meafures of his progrefs, and to make the beft ufe of occafions offered. CHAP. VII. OF A GRAMMAR FOR DEAF PERSONS. Having difpatcht the deaf man's Didionary, I come in the next place to fpeak of his Grammar. I fliould contradid the principles I have formerly laid down, if I fliould infill much upon Grammar ; neither, indeed, doth our Englifli tongue require or afford much to be faid by him, who would be ambitious to fliew himfelf /^a/A/Aar/xwmros. I fliall, therefore, only make fome few reflexions upon Etymology and Syntax, fuppofing Orthography to belong to Lexicography, of which already : and for Profody, our fcholar is no more able to receive its precepts, than a blind man is to judge of colors. I fliall only take notice of five etymological grammatications, and do but name them ; for I judge that thefe and all other points of Grammar are to be deferred, at leaft as to an accurate explaining of them, until he be fitted for the ftudy of Grammar, in manner as I have faid before. The firft is the plural number, for which the rule is but one and eafy. Add s to the fingular, pen, pens, and the exceptions are not many, which here I pafs by. 2. The comparative and fuperlative degree, almoft as eafy as the other. They are formed by adding the terminations er and est, or by the auxiliary words, more, most, as hard, harder, hardest, or mwe hard, most hard. The exceptions are not many. 3. The participle adive or neuter in ing, from which I think there is no exception ; and the participle paflive, which is oftentimes the fame with the preter-imperfect tenfe without an auxiliary word, as, / loved ; or the preter-perfed tenfe with an auxiliary word, as, / have loved : but from this rule are a multitude of 1 44 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. exceptions, which is the greateft irregularity in the Englifh Tongue. 4. The adverb of the manner ends in ly. This alfo hath its exceptions, but not many. 5. The abftra6t ending in ness generally. Thefe things you need not teach your fcholar by rule, for a little prac- tice will enable him to make a rule for himfelf, and to bring the excep- tions too under his rule ; as we hear outlandifh men and children faying often, mans^ womans^foots^ for men, women, feet. As for that ambiguity, that almoft every concrete fubftantive in Englifh is ufed verbally, as fen, hand, foot, S^c, this adds much to the copious- nefs, emphafis, and elegancy of the language, and yet gives very little caufe of miftake, the conllrudion of the words determining the fignifica- tion. But the verbal fignification of thefe words being metonymical, it will be bell to leave them to their own place. So much for Etymology Ihall ferve in this place : now for Syntax. The learned languages make two general parts of Syntax, agreement and government ; whereas it feems to me, that with them Syntax requires a diftribution antecedent to this ; to wit, that the Syntax of words is either per se or per aliud, i. e. the grammatical coherence and connexion of words is made by the terminations of the words themfelves, or by auxiliary words called particles. But neither the one nor the other of thefe diftri- butions does our language require or admit of, being freed from all incum- brances of inflexions by genders and cafes, except a few pronouns, and, confequently, from the rules of agreement and government ; all our Syntax confifting in the cement of auxiliary particles. To treat of Syntax then in Englifli, is to fliew the ufe of the particles in forming words into fentences. For to explain thefe notions feparately, were to build caftles in the air ; and to form fentences without them, were to make ropes of land. Here I will not infill upon explaining every (ingle particle, as if I were dealing with a dumb fcholar ; but remembring that the prefent addrefs is more to the mailer than the fcholar, I will inftance only in fome few, which may ferve for a clew to guide any ingenious adventurer thro the whole labyrinth. As I would advife the dumb fcholar to be often put to pra6tice upon DID ASCALOCOPHUS. 1 45 verbs of bodily adion, varying the circumftances by tlie particles, fo will I fingle out the verb cut, to be the principal verb in the following exam- ples for explaining the particles. I begin with pronouns, which, according to tlie notation of the word, are words put for other words. Let, therefore, thefe things be prefent, for whofe names the pronouns are the prmocabula ; and then it will be eafy to make your fcholar underlland the ufe of thefe pronominal words. I will inftance, firft, in the demonftratives, /, thou, he, we, ye, they. Let there be fix perfons prefent, as many more as you will. Write down, / cut, thou cut, he cut, we cut, ye cut, they cut. Let the mailer take his fcholar by him, and place a third perfon over againft him, all of them prepared with a knife, and apple, or flick, &c. Let the matter cut firft, pointing to the words / cut. 2. Let the fcholar cut, the mafter pointing to the words thou cut. 3. Let the third perfon cut, pointing to he cut. And for the plural number, let the mafter and his fcholar ftand firft together, placing two more near them, and two over againft them. Then let the mafter and fcholar cut, pointing to we cut; let the two by them cut, pointing to ye cut. 4. Let the two over againft them cut, pointing to they cut. The pofteffives, mine, thine, his, ours, yours, theirs, may be taught after the fame manner ; my apple, thy opple, his apph, our apple, your apple, their apple, mutatis mutandis. In fliort, all pronominal words after the lame manner ; nil cut, none or nobody cut, this boy cut, that boy cut, the same boy cut, another boy cut, &c. Let him pradice much upon this and other verbs, till you find that he is able to make thefe diftindions of himfelf. When he can diftinguifti perfons, it will be eafy from many examples, cuttest, cutteth, breakest, breaketh, holdest, holdeth, to make him underftand, that the fecond and third perfon lingular are diftinguifhed by termination from the other perfons. For the iigns of tenfes, do, dost, doth, have, hast, hath, wa^, wast, were, shall, will, write down, / have cut the pen, I do cut the apple, I tvill cut the stick ; cut accordingly, pointing to your fcholar ; or write, / have stood, I do stand, I will stand ; do accordingly. / have walked, I do stand, I will sit ; do accordingly. Do not trouble your fcholar with too nice diftindions of words, liich as shall and will, did and have ; it is enough for him, as yet, 1 46 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. that he underftand the ufe of words in the common forms of fpeech, as illiterate perfons do. Let him pradice much upon the pronouns, and figns of tenfes, with verbs of a6bion, adding other circumftances of time, place, manner, &c. and that with all the variety poffible, of familiar, plain, eafj, moft com- mon, and moft frequently occurring circumftances. The copula will be eafily underftood, becaufe of its frequent ufe, both affirmatively and negatively; Fire is hot, water is not hot ; ff^ater is cold, fire is not cold. So in all its inflexions ; as, / am tall, thou art short, he is thick, I am sitting, thou art standing, he is walking. The particles or and and, with the adjeftives same and diverse, are to be diligently inculcated, as being words of frequent ufe, and ufeful for explication, and declaring the fenfe of other words. Or, in the explicative fenfe of it, coming between words fignifying the fame thing ; and, between words fignifying diverfe things. It may be good to write down many examples of fynonymous words and phrafes which your fcholar underftands, joyning them with or, as . I stand, , , I or I to go, I wide The same, < I do stand, -^ or the same, < or the same, i or I to walk. i broad, ^ I am standing. ^ ^ So for the copulative and, give fuch examples as thefe : ( Hand ( Pen ( Sun Diverse, < and diverse, I and diverse, < ayid \ Foot. (Ink. ( Moon. But the frequent recurring of thefe and many fuch like in common, familiar, and neceftary forms of fpeech, will foon make them to be under- ftood. As for particles fignifying motion, as to, from, thro, by, into, out of, hither, thither, hence, thence, &c. whether prepofttions or adverbs ; fo diftance, as, far off, near, at, hard by, close by, Sec. ; pofition, as before, behind, above, upon, beneath, about, up, down, beyond, on this side, &c. : their ufe and meaning is fo plain and obvious, that there needs no more but choice of fit examples to make them underftood. The table is before your face, the chair is behind your back, the book is upon the table, my hand is above the table, DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 1 47 the nofe is between tlie eyes, the eyes are above the mouth, the moutli is under the eyes, the tongue is in the mouth, to put out the tongue, to rife up, to lit down, go to the door, from the door, come hither, go thither, &c. Thefe and fuch like words, lignifying circumftances perceivable by fenfe, are as eafily apprehended as words lignifying bodily fubllance or fenlible quality. Even the particles of a metaphylical extraftion, and more remote from fenfe, may be ealily underllood, if the teacher be not too metaphylical in his application. I will mention here only two topicks of this kind of particles ; the caufes and the comparates, which are the two principal linews of difcourfe. The particles from the caufes are diverfe, from, of, ivith, by, wherefore, therefore, because, why, &c. Ufe examples fuch as thefe : This pen was made by the mailer of a goofe-quil, for to write after my copy. Explain why, wherefore, what is the cause, by expollulations and interrogations with your fcholar himfelf or others, and because in anfwer to thefe. Obferve here, that many of thefe particles being very equivocal, it will not be prudence to reprefent this difficulty all at once, left it amaze and difcourage your fcholar. For example, you have made him underftand the caufal particle with, in fuch examples as thefe ; to cut with a knife, to vrrite with a pen ; do not immediately put him upon the particle of fociety with, as, go with me ; but explain the various ufe of fuch particles, as they offer themfelves occalionally in pradice, and as you find his capacity is able to receive : for, improving of occalions and complying with the fcholar's capacity, will be the mafter's greateft commendation. Not but that he may be put upon learning many fet forms for exercife of memory, tho he underftand them not perfedly. But do not put his underftanding to the rack, by an undifcreet prelfing upon his apprehenlive faculty, notions either limple or complex, which you find he receives not readily. But make a colleftion of fuch words, and watch opportunities of explaining them. I can give tio better rule for explaining words hard to be under- ftood, than that which Horace has given, in a cafe not much unlike ours. Dixeris egregie, notum si callida verbum Reddiderit junctura novum. 1 48 DID ASC ALOCOPHUS. Where the principal verb of a fentence is clearly apprehended, it brings great light to other circumftantiating words. So that the fkilful chuiing of verbs of aftion, well underftood by your fcholar, and the like dexterity in placing a hard word which you would have him to underftand, amongft other words of circumftance already well underftood, in conftruftion with the verb, every word of the fentence will refle6t fome light upon this dark word. The fecond claffis of metaph : or perhaps more properly logical, particles, are thofe that owe their origine to the topick of the comparates ; fuch as, than, much, more, most, less, least, by so much. Sec. Explain thele alfo by many fit examples, in which the feveral degrees of comparifon may be demon- ftrated to the fenfes — This water is as hot as that ; this cheefe, apple, egg, is greater or more great than that ; this apple is the greatest or most great of all the apples ; by how much this ftick, paper, is longer than that, by so much that is bi'oader than this : let the proportion be fitted and meafured. It will be neceffary to make a colleftion of fuch forms of fentences as he underftands, one or two examples of every form, that upon occafion he may have recourfe to them as to rules and precedents in the like cafes ; and, amongft other forms, forget not imperatives and interrogatives, for which he will have early and frequent ufe. Gather up all the forms of interrogation, whe7i ? who f what f where ? whose ? whence f whither ? how long ? many f great ? &c. Form fentences upon every one of thefe inter- rogations in things familiar, and fubjoyn proper anfwers ; as, Whose book is this ? A. Mine, thine, his, thy brother'' s, the master'' s, &c. TVhen shall we go to bed ? A. By and by, at ten (^ clock, an hour hence, &c. Imperative forms ; I pray give me the book, take up the pen, lay down the paper, sit down, rise up, put on your hat, open the dom\ shut the door, &c. For exercife you may find great variety for him ; fuch as, to vary the circumftances propofed, to defcribe things from their caufes, from their contraries, by comparing them with other things, to form a narration of things feen, to write epiftles. Let him be put much upon the exercife of memory, and that not only in loofe words and incoherent fentences, but let him beftow much time and pains in learning by heart, in the firft place, for his lectiones sacrcB upon the Lord's Day and Holy-dayes, the Lord's Praier, the Creed and Ten Commandements, with the Church-Catechifm. DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 1 49 The folemnity and frequency of Divine Service would have good effe6ts upon him, being placed conveniently oppofite to the minifter, with a book before him, and one to direft. him, till cuftome enable him to dire6t him- felf. This would not only excite him to piety and devotion, but in pro- grefs of time, he would come both to underftand, and have by heart the greateft part of Divine Service. Some other feleft paffages of Scripture might be recommended to him, as the Firft Chapter of Genelis, the Hiftory of our Saviour's Nativity and Sufferings. The moll proper books among profane authors for him to pradice on, I think, of many, were -iEfop's Fables, and fome playes where there is much of a6lion. In the application of all I have faid, refped is to be had to the quality of the perfon to be taught ; whether young or old, dull or docile : how to comply with thefe circumftances, mull depend upon the prudence of the teacher. When his progrefs is fo confiderable that it may be laid of him, he underllands the Englilh Tongue tolerably well, he may then be put upon the lludy of Grammar, which will be the more eafy to him, becaufe the courfe of fludy he was in before had a mixture of Grammar in it, as I have faid. Afterwards, or before if you pleafe, he may be taught Arith- metick and fomething of Geometry. CHAP. VIII. OF AN ALPHABET UPON THE FINGERS. Because the conveniency of writing cannot alwaies be in readinefs, neither yet tho it could, is it fo proper a medium of interpretation between per- fons prefent face to face, as a hand-language. It will, therefore, be neceflary to teach the dumb fcholar a finger-alphabet ; and this not only of iingle letters, but alfo for the greater expedition, of double and triple confonants, with which our Englifh doth abound. X 150 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. After much fearch and many changes, I have at laft fixt upon a finger or hand-alphabet according to my mind ; for I think it cannot be conli- derably mended, either by myfelf or any other, without making tinker's work, for the purpofes for which I have intended it ; that is, a diftinOi placing of, and eafy pointing to the fingle letters, with the like diftin6t and eafy abbreviation of double and triple confonants. I deny not but there may be many more abbreviations than I have provided for. namely, of initial fyllables and terminations ; but thefe I DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 151 have paft by at prefent, for two reafons. Firft, I think there will be little need of them, for I doubt not but that with the provifion I have made, an habit equal to that in tliofe who write a quick hand, may very near make the hand as ready an interpreter as the tongue. Secondly, If they fhould be judged needful, I have taken care that with a few rules they may be added, without altering any thing of the inftitution of this prefent fcheme. The fcheme, 1 think, is fo diftin6t and plain in itfelf, that it needs not much explication, at leaft for the lingle letters, which are as diftin6l by their places, as the middle and two extremes of a right line can make them. The rules of pra6tice are two. 1. Touch the places of the vowels with a crofs touch with any finger of the right hand. 2. Poynt to the confonants with the thumb of the right hand. This is all that I think to be needful for explaining the fcheme fo far as concerns the fingle letters, and for the double confonants, I have made proviiion for abbreviating a threefold combination of them. I Ihall here only give the rules of abbre- viation of the feveral combinations I have made choice of, referring the reader for the reafons of my choice, to the following Treatife of double confonants. The firft combination of double confonants I make provifion for, is when A, /, r, s, come in one fyllable with other confonants ; and that two waies, either before or after another confonant, as in thefe examples. 1 . H. I y^' 2. L. I ^^^ 3. R. I ^'.^'^' 4. S. I I'f' { the. ( title. ( tne. ( hats. 1. When thefe four letters are prefixt to other confonants, as in light, salt, heart, hast, the rule is — Point fkin to fkin with the four fingers of the other hand refpeftively to the capital letter, which in the prefent example is T, to which they are prefixt ; which by inftitution defigns the double confonants ht, It, rt, st. 2. When the fame four letters follow another confonant, as in the, title, trie, hats, then point, as before, to T with nail to fkin, which gives th, tl, tr, ts. A fecond combination of double confonants, worthy of this care of abbreviation becaufe of their frequent ufe in Englifh, is when the liquids w, n, come before the mutes and femimutes, b, p, d, t^ g, k, or c ; that is, 152 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. m before b, p, and 7i before d, t, 9, h, c. The rule is — Touch the place of thefe mutes and femimutes with the firft and fecond finger joyned ; and this by inftitution gives the liquid and the refpe6live mute or femimute following, as in lamb, lamp, hand, hunt, anfjer, ink, France. The third abbreviation is of trible confonants in the beginning of a word or fyllable, where s is alwaies the firft ; as in schism, shrew, shrine, spread, strotig, scrag, sphinx, sosthenes, splinter, justle, &c. The rule is — Joyn the thumb to the finger pointing to the other two confonants. And fo much for abbreviation of double and trible confonants. But obferve here, that as fchool-boyes are to learn amavisse before amasse, and isoiita before ■to/Wj and to write words at length before they learn fhort- hand, fo let your dumb fcholar, and others that would pra6lice Da6tylology, firft know and practice upon the fingle letters, before they come to praftice upon the rules of abbreviation. Now, tho this way of fhort-hand, or abbreviation of words, be diftinft, eafy, quick, and comprehenfive, yet is there another way of pra6tifing, which comes nothing fhort of this in other refpeds, and in one refpeft feems to be preferable, that it fuppofes nothing neceffary to be known for pradifing but the places of the fingle letters, without making new rules for diftinguifliing double and trible confonants from the fingle. The rule is — Point to all the fingle letters of the double or trible confonant, simul et semel, which will be found to be as eafy as poynting by the former inftitution with one fingle touch, as will appear in thefe examples ; when, which, the, light, blunt, brand, grunt, plaster, spread, strong, &c. If here it fhould be obje6ted, that this will breed confufion, leaving the reader doubtful what letter to begin with, to this I anfwer : 1. For double confonants in the beginning of a fyllable, this objeftion can never be of any force ; for there is no Englifli word found wherein their order is inverted, as will appear from the following Treatife of double confonants. 2. For double confonants in the end of a word, fo far as concerns the fecond combination formerly mentioned, there can never be any mif- take ; for fcarce, I think, is there any example occurs wherein their order is inverted, or if there did, then the rule will be in that cafe — Point to the fingle letters diftindly. So that the objedion is of no force, except DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 153 only againft the firft combination of double confonants, and that only in the end of a fyllable ; for there are fome, but not many examples, where the order is inverted, as, salt, title, hast, hats. But to this it may be anfwered, that in a continued fentence the fenfe will ealily determine the cafe, and take away all ambiguity ; as, Here lies one hat, there lie two hats. But if you have occalion to diftinguifti the word hats from hast, then you muft point to all the letters diftin6tly. And this compendious and expeditious way of Cheirology may be extended further than this abbreviation of double and trible confonants ; for they that are mafters of a language, and have got a conliderable readi- nefs of pradiling, by diftin6t touches of lingle letters, will find it as eafy as it is ufeful, to exprefs whole fyllables and whole words that are mono- fyllables, fpecially in words of common ufe, with one multiplyed touch, simul and semel. My meaning by this multiplyed touch simul and semel, is not to touch diftindly all the letters of a fyllable or word, by the index or any one (ingle finger of the other hand fucceffively, making fo many diftind motions from place to place, as there are letters in the fyllable, but fo to order the matter, that an equal number of the fingers of the other hand may be ufed for a fimultaneous touch to make the word or fyllable, according to the number of letters it fhall happen to confift of. This way of expreffing fyllables, and words monofyllables, with one mul- tiplied touch, after a little praftice, will be as eafy and quick as pointing to one fingle letter with a fingle touch ; it will be alfo as dillin^ as point- ing to every letter fucceffively with one finger. But let it be well obferved here, that tho I would have a whole fyllable expreffed with one fiingle adion and motion of the whole hand, yet let not the diftind touches be fo fimultaneous, but that it may appear where the word begins and where it ends. Here I think will be a proper place to give a rule how to know when a word is ended, and it is this. Let there be a continued adual touch of more fingers, or one at leaft, till the word be ended ; or if this happen, as it may in fome words, to be uneafy, then make a quick motion from the place of the lall letter of the word. But this diflficulty, after a little prac- tice, will vanifh away. 1 54 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. Now, becaufe this difcourfe may fall into the hands of fome that have triflino- heads like my own, to whom it will be acceptable to know what other waies of Dadylology I have had under conlideration, I will, for fatisfying their curiofity and perhaps faving them the expence of vain labour, mention fome other waies which I have confidered, and after examination rejected. The firft way is to make the figures of the letters upon the hand, which differs only from writing in this, that the one is tranfient and the other permanent. It is true, that this is more ready upon all occafions than writing; but neither dillindnor quick enough to be taken notice of here. A fecond way is the forming of the letters fymbolically ; as, to make an X by croffing two fingers, a crofs touch upon the end of the thumb for a T, three fingers joyned for M, two fingers joyned for N, &c. This fymbo- lical way I rejed, as being defective in two refpefts ; firft, it is defedive in the point of fymbolizing, for it will not be eafy with the fingers to reprefent the fhapes of all letters. This way of expreffing the letters fymbolically, is fomewhat like the conceit of a fymbolical charafter, and a language of nature, which fome have talked much of, but without any foundation in nature, and therefore all attempts of art muft be in vain. But fecondly, this way is too laborious, and fo defedive in anfwering one of the principal ends for which Cheirology is defirable, and deferves the name of an art ; that is, a quick and ready expreffion and interpretation of the conceits of the mind, coming as near as poffible to that of the tongue. The third way is to defign every lingle letter by a fingle touch, which I judge much the better way than either of the other two, as being more fimple, diftind, eafy, and of quick difpatch. Having, therefore, refolved upon this, that the moft proper way to exprefs the fimple elements of the alphabet would be by a fingle touch, it remained that they ihould be diftinguiflied amongft themfelves by their places. And here again, after confideration and tryal, I have rejeded feveral waies of diftinguifhing the letters by places. Firft, I provided places on both hands, back and fore, but finding this laborious and intricate, and perceiving that there might be diftindion enough found in one hand, I placed the whole alphabet upon DIDASC ALOCOPHUS. 1 55 one hand ; yet fo as to make ufe of an equal number of places on both fides of the hand. But at laft finding that all the necefTary dillin6tions could be provided for on one (ide of the hand, I fixt upon the inftitution of the prefent fcheme ; which, I think is done with that confideration and care that, as I faid before, it cannot be much improved. Here I thought to have kept one fecret of art to myfelf, at leaft till I fhould fee how other things I had difcovered fhould pleafe ; but I mull confefs my own weaknefs, that in things of this nature I am 'pknus rima- rum. I know not how confiderable this fecret will feem to others, but I declare, that I may confefs another weaknefs, that I was much affefted with it ; for, after a long and tyrefome chafe, and having purfued my notion, as I thought, to a nil ultra, when I was fet down and pleafing myfelf with my purchafe, on a fudden I fancied myfelf to fee an one- handed deaf man coming to me, and as much as I could read in his eyes and countenance, expoftulating with me thus : What have you done ? Is there no help for me ? Shall one eye ferve in Schematology, and one ear in Pneumatology ; one tongue in Gloffology, yea one hand in Typo- logy ; and fhall not one hand ferve in Da6bylology ? With this fixing my eyes ftedfaftly on his hand ftretched out, I thought with myfelf that I could difcern a mouth and a tongue in his hand ; the thumb feemed to repre- fent the tongue, the fingers and the hollow of the hand the lips, teeth, and cavity of the mouth. Upon this I made fiigns to him to try to follow me, as I pointed to the letters on my own hand, which he did fo exadly that the furprife put me in amaze for feme time. But when I had overcome my paffion, reflefting upon this wonder both of nature and art, I obferved that of the twenty-four letters, he pointed to fixteen with his thumb. Thus I difmiffed my deaf and lame patient, bidding him be of good courage, and live in hopes of an effedual and fpeedy cure. But after he was gone, I began to conlider with myfelf: What ! fhall I magnify this as a myftery and wonder of nature and art, to find a way to metamorphofe a chimaera into a man, or to make a black fwan white ? This will be magrio conatu magnas nugas agere. As I was thus thinking, it happened that I was fmoking a pype of tobacco, and having a prefent occafion to difpatch a fpeedy meflage, I was unwilling to let my pype go J ^Q DIDASCALOCOPHUS. out, and fo at that prefent was deprived both of the ufe of my tongue and one hand ; wherefore refleding upon the lefTon which I had lately taught the one-handed deaf man, or (hall I rather fay, which he taught me, I call a boy to me, whom I had trained up in Da6lylology, and delivered my meiTage to him with one hand. He, Itaring in my face with a fmiling countenance, for I had never fpoken to him before that time with one hand, performed the meflTage very readily, and returned me a fpeedy anfwer, ufing the fame organ of interpretation, for I furprifed him eating an apple, to me which I had done to him. This gave me occafion to think that this point of art had not only one-handed deaf men for its objed, but that there mio-ht be many other cafes wherein it might be ufeful to fpeak with one hand ; as to fpeak to a dumb man riding on horfeback, holding the reins with one hand, and with the other aiking him, How do you do ? or fitting at table, holding the cup with one hand and with the other faying, Sir, my fervice to you ; or, with one hand holding the knife and with the other aiking. What will you be pleafed to have ? &c. And if any man could be fuppofed to have that readinefs and prefence of mind which is faid to have been in Julius Caefar, he might at once keep up difcourfe with three feveral perfons upon feveral fubjeds, talking to two with his two hands, and to a third with his tongue. And here, by the by, it is obfervable, that without any diftraftion of mind one may fpeak both to a deaf and blind man at once, expreffing the fame words by the tongue to the blind man, and by the hand to the deaf. Nay, further, I declare that as much as I have as yet been able to dif- cover by praftice, I judge the way of fpeaking with one hand preferable to the other of uiing both, and that in all refpefts unlefs it be in this one, that it is not capable of diftin6tion enough for all the neceifary abbrevia- tions of double confonants, which perhaps, after a readinefs and habit acquired, may not be needful ; or if it were, yet I know that one hand is capable of many more diftin6lions than I have as yet made ufe of; but at prefent I think it not ianti to make ufe of them, for I forefee, that the conveniency will fcarce ballance the inconveniencies. Now, tho the pra6lifing of this hand-language be fo plain and eafy from the following fcheme, and the preceding explication of it, that any one DIDASCALOCOPHUS. I57 who can but read, without knowing to write, may become his own teacher ; yet, feeing the nature of all flvill and cunning deferving the name of an art, is fuch that Ibmething of inftrudion mva voce is, if not neceflTary, at leaft ufeful, fo here, fomething of diredion from one well fkilled in the praftice of this art, either viva voce, or, which is the fame thing and as emphatick a way of teaching if it were pra6ticed, dipto demonstranfe, will be of good ufe to young praditioners. I will add one help more for enabling young beginners to pradice more eafily and readily ; let a pair of gloves be made, one for the matter and another for the fcholar, with the letters written upon them in fuch order as appears in the foregoing fcheme. To pra6tice with thefe, will be eafy for any that do but know their letters and can fpell ; and a fliort time will fo fix the places of the letters in the memory, that the gloves may be thrown away as ufelefs. Having laid open the whole progrefs of my thoughts in this difcovery of Cheirology, it remains that I make good my promife in the title-page, of fliewing that it is ufeful both in cafes of neceffity and conveniency. Firft, then, I think none will deny but that it is neceflTary for perfons deaf or dumb ; and therefore I fliall fpare myfelf the labour of proving it any other way, than by referring the reader to the feries and fcope of this whole difcourfe. But here it will be very proper to add fomething how it may be made moft ufeful to the deaf man, and in order to this let it be conlidered : That the nature of Cheirology is fuch, that it is only ufeful in fociety and converfe with others ; fo that, if the deaf man be trained up in this art, and have nobody about him fkilled in it but himfelf, it is of no ufe to him at all; as, on the contrary, if all people were as ready in this hand- language as he may rationally be fuppofed to be, then the hand between him and others, would be of the fame ufe that the tongue is to other people amongft themfelves. But feeing, according to the received way of training up youth hitherto, by which no care is taken of teaching them Cheirology, he can have none, or very few to converfe with him in this way, it will be the concern of the deaf perfon's friends, belide the influ- encing all his familiars to acquaint themfelves with this art for his caufe, to chufe fome fit perfon to be a conftant companion to him, and to be his Y 1 58 DIDASCALOCOPHUS. interpreter upon all occafions amongll ftrangers. And, which is yet a more weighty concern, it would be their wifdom to projeft a match for the deaf perfon, man or woman, betimes, that the perfon they are to match with may be trained up in Cheirology, which would add very much to the comfort of their life ; they being thereby able to exprefs and communicate their fentiments intelligibly, not only by Dactylology in the light, but alfo by Haptology in the dark. In the fecond place, I am obliged to fhew the general ufefulnefs and conveniency of this art to all mankind. The particular cafes wherein it may be convenient, are many more than can be expeded that I fliould inftance in ; I ftiall therefore mention only three generals ; 1 . Silence ; 2. Secrecy ; 3. Pleafure. In cafes of necelfary lilence, it may be ufefiil to inferiors in the prefence of great perfons, to thofe that are about fick people, as near relations, nurfes, &c. So for fecrecy, if people be in com- pany, but not fo near as to whifper one another in the ear, it performs the office of whifpering, it delivers and receives fecret mefTages, &c. And, laftly, for pleafure ; it may be an ingenious and ufefiil divertifement and pafs-time for young people. Here it may be objeded, that all the conveniency will not ballance the pains that muft be taken in learning this art. This obje6tion puts me in mind of another, and that a very conliderable conveniency, and therefore I anfwer — The pains that is taken about learning a hand-language, if it were learned in due time, that is in childhood, would be fo far from liin- dring, that it would contribute much to the child's progrefs in learning to read, if he were taught both to know his letters, and to fpell upon his fingers. This would pleafe the child's fancy, and imprint the letters the fooner upon his memory, having his book alwaies open before his eyes. So that I look upon this as the greateft conveniency of Cheirology, that it would be of fo great ufe, and learned with fo little pains. And this confideration put me upon thinking of a more advifeable way of training up young ones, than any yet praftifed; that is, to begin children to know their letters upon an hand-book inftead of an horn-book, or at lead to have a hand-book upon the backfide of their horn-book ; for I make no doubt, but before they could come to know the names and figures DIDASCALOCOPHUS. 159 of the letters, they would know their places upon the hand, and be able to point to them with the other, or the fame hand, as readily as to pro- nounce them with the tongue. And who will not acknowledge that it were a thing defirable, and de- fervedly to be efteemed as a piece of liberal education, to be able to fpeak as readily with the hand as with the tongue ? And, therefore, who would not think it worth the while to train up young children, from their a b c, in Gloflblogy and Cheirology, pari passu ? Specially feeing the one is no hinderance but a confiderable help to the other, for I may truly fay in the poet's words, Alterius nam Altera poscit opem res, et cmijurat amice. I thought, for the ufe of children, to have given feme direftions for facilitating the elementary difcipline of knowing the letters, fpelling, and reading, whereby not only the old way might be made much fmoother, but alfo by one and the fame labour, a confiderable acceffion of ufeful know- ledge might be attained by the young fcholar, that is, together with read- ing in books reading on the hand ; and, as a neceflary appendage of this, writing upon or fpeaking with, call it which you will, the hand ; whereas, writing with the hand, according to the common ufe of the word, is by itfelf a diftinft and laborious art. But I fear left fome may think that I have already ftuft this difcourfe too much with trifles, and pedantry. A DISCOURSE OF THE NATURE AND NUMBER OF DOUBLE CONSONANTS. MUCH hath been faid by many learned men, to defcribe the nature and caufes of limple founds, which are the firft elements of fpeeeh ; as alfo of diphthongs and triphthongs, if any fuch be, coalefcing of two or three vowels into one fyllable ; but of the coalition of two or more con- fonants into one fyllable, little or nothing, for what I know, hath been faid by any. And yet this compofition of confonants deferves as much to be explained, or rather more than the other of vowels, becaufe of its greater variety and ufe, efpecially by him who would treat of a Philofo- phical Language, or a Grammar for deaf perfons ; fo that my firft Treatife of ^rs Signorum or Sematology, with this fecond of Didascalocophus, which is a legitimate offspring of that, obliged me to this enquiry. If the queftion fhould be put ; 'vhether, in framing of words, it were a more rational inftitution, that a fingle confonant and a fingle vowel fhould alwaies fucceed one another alternately, or that there fhould be a mixture of fyllables allowed, made partly of diphthongs partly of double confonants ? 162 A DISCOURSE My own judgment in the cafe is : That both nature and art would make their firft choice of an alternate fucceffion of lingle vowels and confonants, and that their next choice would be, of fuch compounded vocal founds as are commonly called diphthongs, and defcribed by Grammarians, and fuch compounded clofe founds as are moll natural and of an eafy pronouncia- tion ; for defcribing of which this difcourfe is intended. But that fuch a language could derive its origine from blinded nature, and not from art, or a Divine inftitution, is no waies probable ; for I con- ceive that there is now no language upon the face of the earth in common ufe, but admits of a mixt compoiition of diphthongs and double confonants. And the more rude and uncivilized the people are, the more frequent this compofition is with them, and the founds the more liarfti and unpleafant. That roughnefs of fpeech wears out with roughnefs of manners, and fmoothnefs of the one is a natural confequence of the fmoothnefs of the other, the Englifli Language and Nation is a fufficient proof And if this be granted, it is argument enough to prove, that nature without art, or fome more powerful affiftance, would never bring forth a language in which there fhould be no diphthongs or double confonants; nature, I fay, as it is now in its degenerate eftate : how flie would have decided this queftion in her primitive integrity and perfedion, or rather how flie did a6tually decide it, as we are afTured from God's Word flie did, cannot be otherwaics known to us than by fome probable conjeftures. It is generally thought by the learned, that Adam was the author, both by invention and praftice, of the Hebrew Tongue, not as we have it now in any of its dialeds ; yet if be granted, that the Hebrew had for its mother that language which Adam did invent and Ipeak, we may with good reafon conclude that, corrupted as it is, it ftill retains the fubflance and genius of its mother ; there being fome indelible characters upon all languages which common accidents cannot deface. For tho the tra6t of time from Adam to Mofes, was longer than that from Auguflus or Alex- ander the Great to this prefent age, yet the common accidents which are known to change a language could not be fo many and effedual for changing the firft language to that which is now called Hebrew, as they have been known to be for changing the pure Greek into that which now is OF CONSONANTS. 163 ufed by a remnant of the Grecians, and called Modern Greek ; or for changing the pure Latin extant in Claffick authors, into that which is now called Italian ; which languages, notwithftanding, keep Hill fo mani- fell fignatures of their origine, that it is eafy to difcern what item they are branches of. Now, amongft feveral other defaced reliques of that firft and Divine language, remaining not only in the Hebrew but alfo to be found in many other of the Eaftern languages, this feems to be very confiderable, that the Hebrew admits of no compolition either of vowels or confonants in that fame fyllable ; but all their radical words confift generally of a fingle confonant and a lingle vowel, fucceeding one another alternately, which cannot well be fuppofed to be the effed either of degenerate reafon or chance. There are two things more in that ancient language which feem to me unaccountable, without referring them to a fupernatural caufe. One is, that their radical words conlift generally of three confonants, and for the moft part are diflyllables ; and thefe radical words, how different foever in their confonants, yet have ftill the fame points, cametz and pathach, which in oral prolation make the fame vocal found with N, which, as it is the firft letter of their alphabet, and from them in all other languages, lb is it the firft vocal Ibund in nature. And that originally all their words were diftyllables, as fome conjedure, is not improbable ; whereas in all other languages their radicals are generally monofyllables, and I think originally have all been fo ; yea fo far fo, that there are many mono- fyllables found to be composita and decomposita, as the learned Dodor Wallis has ingenioufly obferved in his Englifh Grammar. Another thing is, that the Hebrew does often contrad a whole fentence into one word, incorporating not only pronouns, both prefixt and fuffixt, but alfo prepolitions and conjunftions with the radical word. And this compendium did firft excite me to do fomething for improving the art of Short-hand ; that drove me before I was aware upon a Real Chara6ter ; that again, after a little confideration, refolved itfelf into an Efiable language. This at laft has carried on my thoughts to conlider of a way how a language may be attained by reading and writing, when it cannot be attained by 164 A DISCOURSE fpeaking and hearing. So that this feries and chaine of thoughts has for its firft link an Hebrew grammatication. I take notice of three things more in the Hebrew, which are confider- able upon the account of a rational inftitution, which is not to be found in the common ufage of other languages ; but not fo myfterious as the other three which I have already mentioned. The firft is, their feparating the vowels from the confonants, both by place and charafter, which has fomething natural and fymbolical in it ; for there is fomething in the ftrudure and compofition of the words, analogous to Man the author of them ; the charaders of the confonants. being of large dimenfions and divifible into many parts, reprefent the grofs and material part of man, the body I the vowels being expreft by indiviiible pricks or points, do anfwer to that which is more properly indivifible, the soul. This, toge- ther with a more accurate diftin6tion of vowels into long and fhort, as alfo a more accurate divifion of confonants from their phyfical caufes, that is, the organs of formation, tho of late ufe, according to fome later writers, in that moft ancient language, yet it fhows, at leaft, how the genius of the tongue is fitted not only to comply with fuch an inftitution, but alfo that from all antiquity there have been fome vestigia of that primitive and Divine, or purely rational Sematology, taught by Almighty God or in- vented by Adam before the Fall, (unlefs any fhould have the confidence to affirm, that this, among many other unhappy confequences of the Fall, was one, that it did not only in part deface, but totally wipe out all former impreflions, leaving our firft parent as the blind heathens would have him, mutum et turpe pecus, that is, having his foul as much tabula rasa as ours is when we come into the world,) which have given occafion to Grammarians of later times to bring that part of Grammar to the prefent eftablifliment. But, whatever be the decifion of that grand controverfy about tlie anti- quity of the Hebrew points, the obfervation I have made here will ftill be confiderable. Wherefore I pafs to a fecond thing confiderable, which, without all controverfy, is more ancient and of longer ftanding than fome would have the points to be. It is agreed upon all hands, that there are three principal and cardinal vowels, K M of as ancient a date as the firft invention of letters, which, without giving offence to thofe that are for, or OF CONSONANTS. 165 advantage to thofe that are againft the antiquity of points, may, sano senstiy be ftyled matres ledionis ; becaufe all other vowels are but intermediate founds, and as it were the proles or offspring of thefe three. Wherefore, without interpofing as to the main date of that fo momentous queftion, that which I take notice of here as confiderable, is this, that it has been a thing done with great care and judgment, the eftablifliing thefe three letters for the cardinal vowels or matres ledionis, for they are the three moft diftin6l vocal founds that are in nature ; even as diftin6t as the two extremes and the middle of any thing that has dimenfions can be, all other vowels being but intermediate founds to, and gradually differing from them, j^ is a guttural found, and of all other vowels the moft apert ; 1 is labial, and of vocal founds the moft contrafted ; * is palatine, and equally diftant from both. And as it is poffible that there might be a language copious enough, allowing only the ufe of three vowels, and fecluding double confonants in that fame fyllable, provided Miat the radical words were diffyllables, which feme think to have been the inftitution of the pure and uncorrupted Hebrew ; fo would fuch an inftitution be much more eafy and diftin6t than any language in being; the intermediate founds to thefe three radical vowels being lefs diftind, and therefore often- times giving occafion of miftakes. I have had occafion to mention the third thing confiderable in the preceding Treatife of Didascalocophus ; to wit, their naming the fimple elements of letters by fignificant words, Aleph, Beth, Gimel, Sfc. which, without doubt, is as ancient as the ufe of letters, or at leaft as Mofes : the truth of this the Grecians have confirmed by a very convincing, but withal a very inartificial argument, in naming the letters corruptedly after them. Alpha, Beta, Gamma, Sfc. as I have noted before. Tho I have, in Ai's Signorum, given fuch an analyfis of fimple founds, both vowels and confonants, as feemed to me moft natural and proper upon that occafion, yet I muft here repeat what has been faid there of the nature and number of fimple confonants, otherwife the rules of compofi- tion I am to give cannot be underftood, Confonants, then, are firft to be divided into clofe, and femiclofe. 1. Clofe, when the appulfe of the organs ftops all paflage of breath thro 166 A DISCOURSE the mouth ; and they are in number nine, w?, b, p, n, d, t, ng, r, k. This clofure again is threefold ; 1 . A perfe6l fliutting of the lips, and this pro- duces m, b, p. 2. The fore part of the tongue with the palate, hence n, d, t. 3. The hinder part of the tongue with the palate, hence ng, r k. Thefe nine confonants are capable of another threefold divifion, upon the account of a threefold accident which equally happens to the forefaid clofure of the organs refpeftively. For, 1. If the breath and voice be simul and semel ftopt with the clofure of the organs, like the throwing of a Hone againft a rock, this produces the three mutes, aP, aT, aK. 2. If, after the clofure of the organs, a cmiatiis of breathing be continued, and the repercuffion of the breath from the palTage ftopt, making an inward murmuring like the breaking of a wave againft a rock, which is quickly fpent and huftit into lilence, the fame clofure of organs produces the three femimutes, aB, aD, aw 3. If, upon the clofure of the organs, there be a free paffage of breath and voice thro the nofe, like the founding of an organ-pipe when the key is touched, this produces a third diftin6lion of fonorous letters from the fame clofure, aM, aN, aNG, (by ng I mean that found which is heard in anger, hunger, not in danger, hinge,) and thefe three founds may be continued after the clofure of the organs as long as one will. I have placed a vowel before thefe confonants, becaufe their power appears more diftinftly than when the vowel follows. Hence I infer, that the number of clofe confonants is nine, neither more nor lefs : not more I fay, becaufe I find that fome add three more, hm, hn, hng, calling them mutes, making only this difference between them and w, n, ng, that the one is uttered vocally, the other whifperingly ; but if a whifpering and a vocal breath make diftind letters, there will be more diftindions of letters than the authors of this opinion feem to approve ; and if this be reafon enough to multiply letters, I know not but foft fpeaking, and crying about the ftreets may have the fame power. That certain other diftindions in the forming of thefe or any other letters, may be fancied by curious and mufical ears, from the modes and degrees of ftiutting the organs, the intention and remiffion of the voice, the tone being more grave, acute, &c., I readily grant ; but how to make more diftindions from thefe three clofures, plain and eafy to be difcerned, and OF CONSONANTS. 167 worthy to be fo far taken notice of as to be placed in the alphabet, is a thing I could never reach. Again, I faid no lefs than nine, becaufe common cuftome has made one of thefe a double confonant, writing it with two letters, ng, the found of neither of which is to be heard in pronounciation, but a perfedly diftinft fimple found from the power of both, as in si7ig,ring,lwig, and from all letters whatever. And it is obfervable, that our Englifh is very unconftant in expreffing the power of this letter ; fometimes by ng in the end of a word, as singy hang, long, where nothing of the found either of n or g is heard ; fometimes by n alone before its brother confonants, k, g ; before k every where, as ink, rank, drunk ; before g in the middle of a word, as hnger, hunger, tho not alwaies fo, for in danger, stranger, &c. n keeps its own power. If any be fo far prejudiced with the ufe of the Latin, which alwaies exprefles the power of this letter by n, and other modern languages, let him look a little higher to the Greek, where he will find three things confiderable of this letter. 1 . That it is no double confonant, but expreft with one fingle charader, 7. 2. That it is expreft not by a letter of a diftind tribe, as in the Latin, but by one of its own fraternity, that is, by a letter formed with the fame clofure of the organs with itfelf. 3. That it never goes before any other confonant in that fame fyllable, but thofe of its own tribe y, x, x-. g, which is according to the true reafon and rules of compounding confonants in the end of a fyllable, as I fhall make appear by and by. The Romans, finding that it was a fonorous letter, rejeft 7 as being a femimute, and fubftitute for it n, agreeing with it formally in that fame analogy of found, but differing from it materially, as being formed by a diftin6t clofure of organs. Great Voffius may excufe my being fo long upon this one letter ; for he, after fpending a whole chapter upon it, concludes with a profeft uncer- tainty of judgment, whether to make it a fingle letter, a sesquilitera, or a double confonant. I thought once I had been lingular in my opinion about it, but afterwards meeting with Doftor Wallis's Englifh Grammar, I perceived that he had given the fame account of it long before me. The femiclofe founds are of two forts ; fome of them are formed from 168 A DISCOURSE the wholeclofe founds and are called afpirates, becaufe they are formed by a partial opening of the organs, and fending forth the breath thro the mouth ; hence the number of them are fix, f, th, x^ from p, t, k, and i\ th^ as in that, gh from the femimutes b, d,g ; for there can be no afpirates from m, n, nq. 2. That nimble inftrument of articulate voice, the top of the tono-ue, brings forth three more femiclofe founds, /, r, s, andfo doubles the number of letters formed by the other organs. 1 . iy is formed by a clofe appulfe of the top of the tongue to the palate, the iides not touching, but leaving an open paffage, which diftinguifhes it from n, where the appulfe makes a perfeft clofure. 2. The appulfe is from the fides of the tongue, the top not touching, but leaving an open paifage to force out the breath ; hence is formed the letter s. 3. A repeated or multiplyed appulfe of the tongue to the palate, by a quick motion of trepidation which produces r, S has affinity to the clofe mutes, p, t, k, and therefore admits of being raifed to a femimute, z, both of which are capable of afpiration, as the clofe mutes and femimutes, sh, zh. Thefe feem to me to be all the fimple confonants in nature perfedly diftin6t, and to be made ufe of in a Philofo- phical Language, for which this was firft intended. And I think that this analyfis of them from their phyfical caufes is plain and eafy, for to purfue all the minute differences of founds, as it were endlefs, fo were it ufelefs. I come now to fpeak of compounding two or more confonants into one fyllable, and that two waies, either in the beginning or end of it ; a thing well to be confidered by him who undertakes to frame a language by art from the principles of nature, and of no fmall ufe in fitting a Grammar for deaf perfons. That I may proceed the more diftinftly in this enquiry, I will begin with the definition of a fyllable, and palling by feveral other defcriptions, I will keep to that of Prifcian and approved by Voffius, as being moft full and appofite to my purpofe : Syllaha est wx literalwy quce sub uno accentu ct uno spiritu indistanter profertur. Where I fuppofe by sub uno mcentu, and uno spiritu, there can be no more than one vowel or diphthong in a fyllable, which, as ^.terminus communis, unites the extreme confonants on each fide, even as the ccvpula unites the fubjeft and the predicate, making one pro- pofition. OF CONSONANTS. 169 My firft rule fliall be — To fpeak properly and in a ftri6t fenfe, there can be no compofition of confonants amongft themfelves, either in the begin- ning or end of a fyllable, but what is preternatural and inconfiftent with the definition of a fyllable. Who does not perceive, that even in the compofition of mutes and liquids in the beginning of a fyllable, as p^at, plot, which of all compofition s of confonants is moft common and alfo judged moft eafy, as not making the preceding vowel long by pofition, yet I fay, even in thofe it is eafy to perceive a distantia terminorum, and that they are united by a rapid fpirit, as a termimis communis, and cannot poffibly be otherwife, feeing they are formed by diftinft clofures of the organs ; and therefore there muft be a tramitm from the one to the other, which appears yet much more evident in the end of a fyllable, with which kind of compofition our Englifli abounds very much, as tahle, riddle, saddle, little, &c. It is true, in fome compofitions of confonants, the transitiis not being from organ to organ, but from one degree of vocality to another, as in lamp, hand, hik, the transitus here is fo quick, that it may be faid to deceive the ears ; much like the colours of the rainbow to the eye, as it is in that ingenious defcription of Arachne's Web. — Ovid. Lib. 6. Met. In quo, diver si niteant cum milk color es, Transitus ipse tamen spectantia luminafallit ; Usqm adeo quod tancjit idem est, tamen ultima distant. But, pafling by the di6tates of right realbn and art, which certainly have not been followed in the primary inftitution of any language, unlefs it be of the Hebrew alone, let us look to ufe which is the fovereign lawgiver to all languages. And more particularly to the ufage of the Greek, which gives laws of Orthography to all the Occidental Languages ; and, firft, for the compounding of confonants in the beginning of a fyllable. Had the Grecians been as carelefs of Euphony and poliftiing their words in the terminations, as they have been in the initial fyllables, their language had been as much inferior to fome others in Euphony, as now it is efteemed more pleafant and graceful. What more rude founds, uneafy to be pro- 170 A DISCOURSE nounced, and barfh to the ear, than -vl/axxw, ^aw. ^aivu, x^wv, (p^isig, vruai?, 3vof 05, (SbriXvyfia, /ivi^fia, yvu(Si5, xri^/ia, xvdxuv, 'Trnvfia,, ^vriaxu, t>Ji//,uv, &C. What caule to alcribe this to I am uncertain, whether to the rudenefs of their language too-ether with others, in its firft origine, or to fome modilh affedation of times and humors, or more particularly to a poetical humor of fyncopizing and contrasting their words, which feems to me moll probable. But this we fee is certain, that they have taken to themfelves fuch a liberty of compounding confonants in the beginning of a fyllable, that their greatell admirers, the Romans, have forfaken them in this ; there fcarce being any fuch double confonants, as any in the fore-mentioned examples in the beginning of a word, in all the Latin Tongue, unlefs it be in fome few words which are manifeftly of a Greek origin. They have gone fo far, that almoft no rule can be formed for their initial fyllables, but quidlibet cum quolihet. Howbeit, I will endeavor to reduce the ufage of the Greek, in this particular, to fome general rules. Firft, There is no double confonant to be found in the beginning of a Greek word, but one of them is a lingual ; thefe are, w, c?, t, I, r, s, z, th, 6, shy zh. Hence I obferve that Voffius goes too far when he bids, in imita- tion of the Greek, to divide a-gmen, te-gme% unlefs he could have produced authority for a fhort vowel before this polition, or a word beginning with giiiy neither of which I think can be found. 2. The liquids, commonly fo called, /, m, n, r, add nq, never come before other confonants, or one another in the beginning of a word, except fivdofiai. 3. None of the clofe confonants, Labials, \ p, b, m, Linguals, l^, d, n. Gutturals, j ng, j nq, r, k. or their afpirates, Labials, Linguals, Gutturals, if they be of the fame organ, can be compounded with one another; except ^v as h6(pb?, ^v as ^v^^xw. In thefe negatives, the Latin, and I think other modern languages, do agree with them. OF CONSONANTS. I7I For affirmative rules, the firft fliall be — The liquids / r come frequently after the mutes and femimutes, with their afpirates, as, tXew yXd dX- X^-a/ii^S d^du ^^dofiai. The rule is univerfally true de Jure, tho not de facto ; or, it is true de generibus singulorum, tho not de singulis generum. Hence, tho there be no bXi-TTu, yet analogy would bear it as well as ^Xetw or y'Kd(pu. So in Latin, tho there be no words beginning with //, yet tlmms would be as analogical as clarus or planus. So in Englilh, flash were as euphonick as plash, clash, 2. S, in the beginning of a word, comes before all kinds of 'confonants in that fame fyllable ; i. e. it is compounded with genera sinqulorum, tho not with singula generum. 1. For the mutes, p, t, k, and their afpirates S' never makes a triple confonant in the begin- ning of a word, but with a mute and liquid following, and this but rarely in Greek, as (fry.nv, STXiyy};, ar^aroi ; fo in Latin, as scribo, spretiis, stratus, tho OF CONSONANTS. 173 the compoiition of s, with any either fingle or double confonant in the beginning of a word, feems to be of no difficult pronounciation. And now I come to double and trible conlbnants in the end of a fyllable. I think our Englifli Tongue, with its mother Saxon, abounds more with this kind of clofure or ending of words with double and trible confonants, than any other common language, which makes us cenfured by neighbour- ing nations, by comparing our pronounciation to the barking of dogs ; for our words being for the molt part monofyllables, and often ending with a harfh collifion of double and trible confonants, and admitting no apoftrophe, this makes us take the more time, and ufe the more force to utter them. 1. The mod natural and eafy compofition of confonants, either in the beginning or ending of a fyllable, is that of the mutes and femimutes following the fonorous letters of their own refpeftive organs of formation, as in thefe examples : mb lamb, dumb, comb, nt ant, hint, hunt, mp lamp, imp, Imnp, ngg tlim(j, long, dung, nd hand, blind, round, ngk think, rank, drunk. 2. The compofition of two confonants next for facility to the former, is when the three femiclofe Unguals, /, r, s, come before other confonants in the end of a fyllable. Examples in Englilh are obvious ; it is true, not of thefe three coming before all other letters, yet the reafon is the fame for all, tlio ufe be not. 8. S, in the end of a word, according to the ufe of our Englifh, makes a double confonant after any other letter, unlefs it be after q, z. Other double confonants there are in the end of a word, but being very irregular and of a harfh found, I pafs them by, fuch as, soft, length, right, apt, &c. 4. For trible confonants in the end of a fyllable, there is none found in any language but where s makes one. I know the Dutch write l^aitbt, but I fuppofe they muft pronounce either hand or hant, for a mute and femimute of that fame organ are inconiiflent founds. And as for our strength and length ; 1 . Tho they be written with four confonants, yet we 2 a 174 A DISCOURSE found but two, neither of which can be WTitten in Englifli but with two charaders ; but, 2dly, I think the moft genuine pronounciation of thefe two words is, as if they were written strenth and knth, according to the Northern diak^ft. 5. And laftly, allowing two ss in two dillin6l places, which often hap- pens, there may be, and are, de facto, in Englifli four confonants after a vowel in that fame fyllable, as \\\ firsts, thirsts. This do6lrine of double and trible confonants, fo far as concerns the ending of words, has but little place in the learned languages ; yet examples are found, both in Greek and Latin, even of trible confonants, as >^afu7^, stirps. Where, obferve that there are no words in Greek ending either in double or trible confonants, but where s either virtually or exprefsly is the laft, and but very few in Latin ending in other double confonants ; fome in nt, as amant, sunt, feme few in nc, as hinc, huric, in sty as est, post. My laft enquiry about double confonants fliall be — How many may come together in one fyllable ? To which I anfwer — Firft, If we follow reafon and the authority of the ancienteft language, there can come no more than two, one before and another after the vowel. 2dly, If we follow the ufage of the other two learned languages, Greek and Latin, fecluding the letter s, there can be no fyllable of above four confonants, two before and two after the vowel. 3dly, Admitting s, which comes both before and after moft letters, there may be a fyllable of fix confonants, three before and three after the vowel. I grant there is no example found, either in Latin or Greek, of above five confonants. yet there are many examples in both of three confonants in the beginning, as er^aHi, sa'ibo; fo of three in the end, as ca^^, stirps; whatever is above this, is liarfli and barbarous. I have heard learned men of the Polifli nation affirm, that there i a monofyllable of nine letters in that language, the orthography of whic.i I took from the hand of a perfon of honour of that nation, thus chrzaszcz. This word I have often heard pronounced by natives, and have myfelf been commended by them for my imitation ; but to ftrangers it feems a bar- barous found, and reaches not the expreffmg of the power of all the letters OF CONSONANTS. I75 with which it is written. Voffius affirms as much of the Dutch. The word he inftances in is t*£{tr^UgS!t- But I am fure if this be allowed for a monofyllable, there may be a monoly liable of eleven letters, according to the analogy both of the Dutch and Englifh ; or rather, I may fay, that there can be no bounds fet to the tongue in this particular. For, firil, if V^tttM^^t, why not ^V^tVtlXQ^t ; for it is clear, even from the fame inftance, that s may come before t in that fame fyllable. If it be faid, that the letter s cannot be repeated thrice, in diftin6t places of that fame fyllable — Firft, I anfwer by retorting, much lefs can t be repeated thrice as here ; for, laying this one word alide, I think it will be hard either to prove by reafon, or to bring another inftance out of any language what- ever, where a word confifting of three tU, disjoyned from one another by the intervention of other letters, is efteemed a monolyllable. 2dly, The analogy of the Englifli allows of fuch a monofyllable, as spasms, schisms. Again, if SStSftr^UQIlSt, why not gft^trniQ^dtSl, and fo in infinitum. That s after t is confiftent in the end of a fyllable, our Englifh abounds with examples, as tasts, fasts. But here it is obfervable, that this compofition we admit of, s coming both before and after another confonant in the end of a fyllable, is very harfli and uneafy, and fcarce to be found in any other language. The French make many fhifts to avoid the harfhnefs of s, either before or after another confonant, and chiefly in the end of a fyllable ; if ^ go before, they leave it out, as in haste, viste ; if it come after, they leave out the confonant that goes before it, as in ioups, animauw. Another thing obfervable of s with its affinis /, when they come alone without the implication of other confonants, they are of an eafy and graceful pronounciation. Homer feems to have loved them, as in thefe : That the prefs fliould have ftript thefe broken ends of verfes of the unneceffary and troublefome luggage of fpirits and accents, is neither the compolitor nor the corre6tor's fault ; I am obliged to excufe them and take the fault, if there be any, upon mjdelf, or rather lay it over upon the 176 A DISCOURSE author, who, were he alive, he would excufe both me and himfelf by the ufe of the times he lived in ; and ufe we know is the fupreme law in all lanoTiages. But if all this do not fatisfy the critical Hellenift, then I muft add further, that ufe in the prefent cafe will even dare to appeal to right reafon ; for whatever may be faid for the cumberfome tackling of fpirits and accents in profe, yet in a verfe accents are downright nonfenfe, imlefs it be tollendce ambiguitatis causa in aequivocal words. That all other appendages befide the letters are unneceffary and trou- blefome, I fliall inftance only in one word, which is fo overgrown with the rickets, that the head is much greater than the whole body ; for whereas the letters of the word are but three, the other appurtenances of it are five, and had it all that fwelling furniture about it in the gloflTology which it hath in the typology, it would choke one to pronounce it. But he muft have more critical ears than mine, that can perceive five diftinftions in 'ill', which are not to be heard in our Englifh err. That this is not a word either made or fought by me, appears by this pafTage of a common epigram : i^^i 'TTod' adriv And here I (hall take the liberty to go one ftep further out of my road, by taking notice that the Grecians have laflit out a little too far, in that which is thought to be the greateft grace of their language ; that is, their words ending much in vowels and diphthongs, and thefe frequently making pure fyllables, one, two, or more, without the intervention of a confonant. One, two, or at moft three, one would think were enough for Euphony ; but four, five, or fometimes fix in the end of a word, I think is too much, fpecially if they make fo many fyllables: apyv^n ro^n founds well ; a^v^ss jSis ig yet more foft and melting ; and agyvgkio (3ioTo founds high and lofty from the mouth of a poet, and fymbolizeth with the more fymbolical hemiftich preceding it ; Ativrj 6s xXayyr) ytvir' a^v^toio ^loio. But /3/ooro and by a dialyfis ^mto, js too foft and lufhious. And for aa^B OF CONSONANTS. I77 and ISoifJo, I know not what other cenfure to pafs on them, but that they are childifh and ridiculous traulifms. It is true, that /3o^o, in the typology of the word, has its fyllables diftin6t enough, but the beft can be faid of it will leave them too identical in the GlolTology. Again, for tscecgy which is the word of the greateft number of vowels without a confonant, that I have happened to meet with, tho it be manifeftly of a Greek origin, yet I know not where to father it upon any Greek author, totidem Uteris et syllahis ; which makes me llrange the more to fee the grave and manly Roman, who, in his imitation of the effeminate Grseculus, hath with a wonderful judgment, fliall I fay, or happinefs, equally avoided the ex- tremes of too much harlhnefs in the beginning of his words, and too much foftnefs and delicacy in the end of them ; yet in this one word to have outdone him in number of vowels, tho not of fyllables. Ovid is my author for this. Metamorph. Lib. 4. JVec tenet ^^^ genetrix pulcherrima Circes. But to return from this digreffion to another obfervation upon the letters / and s. Thefe two letters feem to me to make a great impref- lion upon the body of the French Tongue, as the particles and chiefly the pronouns do in all languages, becaufe of their fo frequent ufe in the pro- vocabula of that language. I have often been pleafantly affeded to hear two talking French, when the pronominal words recurred often, fuch as, ce, cetty dest, cettui, cettuici, cettuila, lui^ celui, iceluiy elk, icelle, celled^ cellece, &c., and many fuch like defcending from the fruitful flock of ca and la ; for thefe words coming from a French mouth, make a pretty foft whifper- ing noife affeding the ear pleafantly. Our own Englifh pronominal words are none of the moft graceful pronounciation, chiefly becaufe of the fo frequent ufe of th, as thou, thy, that, the, this, those, their, &c. This makes outlandifh men call us blcBsi, the found of th never being heard amongft them but by lifpers, who pronounce s vitioufly by the power of this letter. I will conclude with redifying an univerfal miftake of all that have written of Grammar, for want of coniidering the nature of double confonants.* It has pall for current amongft all Grammarians, that we are to divide words 178 A DISCOURSE in all other languages, following the ufe of double confonants among the Grecians, as »^a-^w^«, do-ctus, k-ctus, a-ptm, and not mag-mis, doc-tus, lec-tuSy ap-tus. Voffius goes yet further, as I have had occalion to mention before, and bids us divide se-gjne?i a-gmen, tho there be no precedent for this in Greek. One ancient Grammarian goes yet a ftep further, and bids follow this rule even in compounded words, as o-bnio, o-bh'go, which notwith- ftanding others do except. But Prifcian does well refute this author's opinion by this argument, that poets never ufed thefe fyllables fliort ; fo that for the very fame reafon we mull not divide le-ctus, do-dus^ becaufe they are ufed Hill long by polition. Tho this reafon be convincing enough, yet there is another reafon worthy to be mentioned in this place, which alfo illuftrates and confirms what I have faid before, that the primitive words of other languages, excepting the Hebrew, are for the moft part monofyllables. In all primitive words, I diftinguifli between radical and fervile letters ; the radical part of the word, generally both in Greek and Latin, is eifable in one fyllable, amo, doceo ; am and doc are the radical letters, o in the one and eo in the other being ferviles, and fo changeable in the oblique inflexion of the words ; therefore I think it were reafonable, in dividing the word, to diftinguilh between what is radical and what is fervile. POSTSCRIPT. Tho I make no queftion but I have faid as much as may enable any perfon of ordinary capacity, with extraordinary diligence, to become if not a Didafcalocophus at leaft a Hypodidafcalus to fome more expert Mailer, yet my main defign being not fo much to make every Grammaticafter a Didafcalocophus, as to fatisfy learned men that Cophology is none either of the i^yuv advvdruv, OT husvoriruv ; tliis has made me the fhorter in the prac- tical part. So that any praditioner in this art, not more mafter of it OF CONSONANTS. 179 than myfelf, mull be beholding to me for fome more particular dire6tions. Wherefore if any Philocophus fliould challenge myfelf to make good the title of my book, let him bring a fubjeft duely qualified, male or female, the younger the better, and he fliall find me ready to anfwer his challenge, either perfonally or by proxy. FINIS. CENTRAL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY University of California, San Diego €139 UCSD Libr. UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY AA 001357 818